Faculteit Economie en Bedrijfskunde Faculty of Economics and Business. Studiegids Student Handbook Opleidingen Degree programmes

Faculteit Economie en Bedrijfskunde Faculty of Economics and Business

Studiegids 2013-2014 Student Handbook 2013-2014 Opleidingen Degree programmes

1

Studiegids 2013-2014 / Student Handbook 2013-2014

Inhoudsopgave / Table of contents A.

Bachelorprogramma’s / Bachelor’s degree programmes 10

A.1.

BSc Accountancy en Controlling

10

A.1.1. A.1.2. A.1.3. A.1.4.

Programmabeschrijving Overzicht studieprogramma Substitutie- en/of overgangsregeling Regels en keuzes

10 11 11 11

A.2.

BSc Bedrijfseconomie

13

A.2.1. A.2.2. A.2.3. A.2.4.

Programmabeschrijving Overzicht studieprogramma Substitutie- en/of overgangsregelingen Regels en keuzes

13 15 16 16

A.3.

BSc Bedrijfskunde

18

A.3.1. A.3.2. A.3.3. A.3.4.


18 20 23 23

A.4.

BSc Econometrics and Operations Research

26

A.4.1. A.4.2. A.4.3. A.4.4.

Programme description Degree programme Substitution and/or transition regulations Rules and choices

26 27 28 28

A.5.

BSc Economics and Business Economics

31

A.5.1. A.5.2. A.5.3. A.5.4.


31 34 37 37

A.6.

BSc Fiscale Economie

40

A.6.1. A.6.2. A.6.3. A.6.4.


40 42 42 42

A.7.

BSc International Business

44

A.7.1. A.7.2.

Programme description Degree programme

44 46

2

A.7.3. A.7.4.

Substitution and/or transition regulations Rules and choices

47 48

A.8.

BSc Technologiemanagement

51

A.8.1. A.8.2. A.8.3. A.8.4.


51 53 55 55

A.9.

Verbreding binnen de bacheloropleiding / Additional options within the Bachelor’s degree 57

A.9.1. A.9.2. A.9.3. A.9.4. A.9.5.

Minoren Bachelor Honoursprogramma Introductie Lerarenopleiding Minors Bachelor’s Honours programme

57 58 58 58 59

B.

Schakelprogramma’s (Nederlandstalig)

61

B.1.

Schakelprogramma’s Accountancy en Controlling

61

B.1.1. B.1.2. B.1.3.

Programmabeschrijving Overzicht studieprogramma Regels en keuzes

61 62 62

B.2.

Schakelprogramma Technology and Operations Management 64

B.2.1. B.2.2. B.2.3.


64 65 65

C.

Pre-Master’s programmes (English)

67

C.1.1.

Introduction

67

C.2.

Pre-MSc Business Administration

68

C.2.1. C.2.2. C.2.3. C.2.4.

Pre-MSc BA - Change Management Pre-MSc BA - Organizational and Management Control Pre-MSc BA - Small Business and Entrepeneurship Pre-MSc BA - Strategic Innovation Management

69 69 70 70

C.3.

Pre-MSc Finance

71

C.4.

Pre-MSc Human Resource Management

71

C.5.

Pre-MSc International Business and Management

72

C.6.

Pre-MSc International Economics and Business

72

3


C.7.

Pre-MSc International Financial Management

73

C.8.

Pre-MSc Marketing

73

C.9.

Pre-MSc Supply Chain Management

74

C.10.

Pre-MSc Technology and Operations Management

74

C.11.

Rules and choices

75

D.

Masteropleidingen / Master’s degree programmes

76

D.1.

MSc Accountancy en Controlling

76

D.1.1. D.1.2. D.1.3. D.1.4. D.1.5. D.1.6. D.1.7.

Programmabeschrijving Overzicht studieprogramma Substitutie- en/of overgangsregelingen Regels en keuzes Programmabeschrijving MSc A&C voor HBO-AC Overzicht studieprogramma MSc A&C voor HBO-AC Regels en keuzes MSc A&C voor HBO-AC

76 77 78 78 80 81 82

D.2.

MSc BA – Change Management

84

D.2.1. D.2.2. D.2.3. D.2.4.


84 85 87 87

D.3.

MSc BA – Organizational and Management Control

88

D.3.1. D.3.2. D.3.3. D.3.4.


88 89 90 90

D.4.

MSc BA – Small Business and Entrepreneurship

92

D.4.1. D.4.2. D.4.3. D.4.4.


92 93 95 95

D.5.

MSc BA – Strategic Innovation Management

96

D.5.1. D.5.2. D.5.3. D.5.4.


96 97 98 98

4

D.6.

MSc Econometrics, Operations Research and Actuarial Studies 100

D.6.1. D.6.2. D.6.3. D.6.4.


100 101 104 104

D.7.

MSc Economics

105

D.7.1. D.7.2. D.7.3. D.7.4.


105 106 108 108

D.8.

MSc Finance

109

D.8.1. D.8.2. D.8.3. D.8.4.


109 110 112 112

D.9.

MSc Fiscale Economie

113

D.9.1. D.9.2. D.9.3.


113 114 114

D.10.

MSc Human Resource Management

115

D.10.1. D.10.2. D.10.3. D.10.4.


115 115 116 117

D.11.

MSc International Business and Management

118

D.11.1. D.11.2. D.11.3. D.11.4.


118 119 121 121

D.12.

MSc International Economics and Business

123

D.12.1. D.12.2. D.12.3. D.12.4.


123 124 126 126

D.13.

MSc International Financial Management

128

D.13.1. D.13.2. D.13.3.

Programme description Degree programme Substitutions and/or transition regulations

128 129 130

5


D.13.4.

Rules and choices

131

D.14.

MSc Marketing

132

D.14.1. D.14.2. D.14.3. D.14.4.


132 133 136 137

D.15.

MSc Supply Chain Management

138

D.15.1. D.15.2. D.15.3. D.15.4.


138 139 140 140

D.16.

MSc Technology and Operations Management

141

D.16.1. D.16.2. D.16.3. D.16.4.


141 142 143 143

D.17.

Research Master in Economics and Business

145

D.17.1. D.17.2. D.17.3. D.17.4.


145 146 150 150

D.18.

MSc Lerarenopleiding Economie en Bedrijfswetenschappen 151

D.18.1. D.18.2. D.18.3.


E.

Double degree programmes (BSc and MSc)

154

E.1.

Introduction

154

E.2.

DD BSc E&BE - Economics-IE&B – Fudan University, Shanghai 155

E.2.1. E.2.2.

Programme description Programme content

155 155

E.3.

DD BSc EOR – Fudan University, Shanghai

157

E.3.1. E.3.2.


157 157

E.4.

DD BSc IB – Universitas Gadjah Mada, Yogyakarta

159

E.4.1.

Programme description

159

6

151 152 152

E.4.2.

Programme content

159

E.5.

DD BSc IB – Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta

161

E.5.1. E.5.2.


161 161

E.6.

DD MSc Finance – UAIC of IASI, Romania

163

E.6.1. E.6.2.

Programme description Programme content (for students from Iasi, 2012-2014)

163 164

E.7.

DD MSc IB&M – NUBS, Newcastle

166

E.7.1. E.7.2. E.7.3.

Programme description 166 Programme content (for students who started in Groningen, 2012-14) 168 Programme content (for students who started in Newcastle, 2012-14) 169

E.8.

DD MSc IE&B – Corvinus University, Budapest

170

E.8.1. E.8.2. E.8.3.

Programme description Programme content (for students from FEB) Programme content (for students from CUB)

170 173 174

E.9.

DD MSc IE&B – Georg-August University, Göttingen

176

E.9.1. E.9.2. E.9.3.

Programme description Programme content (for students from FEB) Programme content (for students from GOT)

176 178 178

E.10.

DD MSc Economics-IB&M-IE&B – Fudan University, Shanghai 180

E.10.1. E.10.2. E.10.3. E.10.4.

Programme description Programme content (for MSc Economics students from FEB ) Programme content (for MSc IB&M students from FEB ) Programme content (for MSc IE&B students of FEB )

180 183 184 185

E.11.

DD MSc IFM – UU, Uppsala

187

E.11.1. E.11.2.


187 189

E.12.

DD MSc Marketing, profile Marketing Intelligence – BI, Oslo 190

E.12.1. E.12.2. E.12.3.

Programme description Programme content (for students from FEB) Programme content (for students from BI)

190 192 193

E.13.

DD MSc TOM – NUBS, Newcastle

195

E.13.1. E.13.2.


195 197

7


F.

Substitutie- en overgangsregelingen / Substitution and transition regulations 198

F.1.

Substitutie- en overgangsregelingen bacheloropleidingen / Substitution and transition regulations Bachelor’s degree programmes

F.1.1. F.1.2. F.1.3. F.1.4. F.1.5. F.1.6. F.1.7. F.1.8. F.1.9. F.1.10. F.1.11. F.1.12. F.1.13. F.1.14. F.1.15. F.1.16. F.1.17.

198

Algemeen / General 198 Substitutieregeling BSc Accountancy en Controlling aansluitend op propedeuse Accountancy en Controlling (=E&M/BE) 199 Substitutieregeling BSc Accountancy en Controlling na propedeuse Bedrijfskunde 201 Substitutieregeling BSc Bedrijfseconomie 202 Substitutie- en overgangsregelingen BSc Bedrijfskunde 203 Overgangsregeling BSc Bedrijfskunde, profiel Accountancy en Controlling 204 Overgangsregeling BSc Bedrijfskunde, profiel Business en Management 205 Overgangsregeling BSc Bedrijfskunde, profiel Technology Management 206 Substitution and transition regulations BSc Econometrics and Operations Research 207 Substitution and transition regulations BSc Economics and Business Economics, profile Economics 208 Substitution and transition regulations BSc Economics and Business Economics, profile IE&B 210 Transition regulation BSc Economics and Business Economics, profile Business Economics 213 Substitutieregeling BSc Fiscale Economie 214 Substitution and transition regulations BSc International Business 215 Substitutieregeling BSc Technologiemanagement, profiel Discrete Technologie 216 Substitutieregeling BSc Technologiemanagement, profiel Informatietechnologie 217 Substitutieregeling BSc Technologiemanagement, profiel Procestechnologie 218

F.2.

Substitutie- en overgangsregelingen masteropleidingen / Substitution and transition regulations master’s degree programmes

220

F.2.1. F.2.2. F.2.3. F.2.4. F.2.5.

Algemeen / General Substitutieregeling MSc Accountancy en Controlling Substitution regulation MSc BA, track Business & ICT Substitution regulation MSc BA, track Business Development Substitution regulation MSc BA, track Change Management

220 220 220 220 220

8

F.2.6. F.2.7. F.2.8. F.2.9. F.2.10. F.2.11. F.2.12. F.2.13. F.2.14. F.2.15. F.2.16. F.2.17. F.2.18. F.2.19. F.2.20. F.2.21. F.2.22. F.2.23.

Substitution regulation MSc BA, track Finance 221 Substitution regulation MSc BA, track Marketing 221 Substitution regulation MSc BA, track Organizational & Management Control 221 Substitution regulation MSc BA, track Operations & Supply Chains 221 Substitution regulation MSc BA, track Small Business & Entrepreneurship 222 Substitution regulation MSc BA, track Strategy & Innovation 222 Substitution and transition regulations MSc Econometrics, Operations Research & Actuarial Studies 222 Substitution and transition regulations MSc Economics 222 Transition regulation MSc Finance 223 Substitution and transition regulations MSc Human Resource Management 223 Substitution and transition regulations MSc International Business and Management, track IB&M 223 Substitution regulation MSc International Business and Management, track IFM 223 Substitution and transition regulations MSc International Economics and Business 224 Transition regulation MSc International Financial Management 224 Transition regulation MSc Marketing 224 Transition regulation MSc Supply Chain Management 224 Substitution and transition regulations MSc Technology and Operations Management 225 Substitution and transition regulations Research Master Economics and Business 225

9


A.

Bachelorprogramma’s / Bachelor’s degree programmes

A.1.

BSc Accountancy en Controlling

A.1.1.

Programmabeschrijving

Opleidingsdirecteur: dr. E.P. Jansen, 050-363 6382, [email protected] Opleidingscoördinator: mw. I.M. Luttmer-Noest, 050-363 3768, [email protected] Secretariaat: mw. E.H. van der Voort-Toisuta, 050-363 3768, [email protected] Studieadvies: Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/bachelorstudent Taal: Nederlands Van de bacheloropleiding Accountancy en Controlling wordt het derde jaar in 2013-2014 voor het laatst aangeboden. Instromen als nieuwe student in de bacheloropleiding is dus niet meer mogelijk. Het eerste jaar van de bacheloropleiding Accountancy en Controlling is in het studiejaar 2011-2012 voor het laatst aangeboden. Voor de inhoud van de propedeuse wordt verwezen naar de studiegids 2011-2012. Het tweede studiejaar is in 2012-2013 voor het laatst verzorgd. Voor de inhoud van dat tweede jaar wordt verwezen naar de studiegids 2012-2013. Studenten die accountant of controller willen worden, wordt geadviseerd om te kiezen voor de BSc-opleiding Bedrijfskunde en in studiejaar 2 in te stromen in de track Accountancy en Controlling van die opleiding. Doel/inhoud Het vakgebied Accountancy en Controlling richt zich op de betrouwbaarheid van informatie voor de besturing van organisaties en voor het afleggen van verantwoording over het gevoerde beleid aan de interne en externe stakeholders. Om betrouwbare bestuurlijke informatie te kunnen verschaffen is inzicht nodig in de belangrijkste aspecten van het beleid van organisaties. Daarom heeft de opleiding als doel je niet alleen wetenschappelijke kennis van, inzicht in en vaardigheden op het gebied van accountancy en controlling bij te brengen, maar ook wetenschappelijke kennis en inzicht op het gebied van de bedrijfswetenschappen. In het begin van de bachelor ligt het accent op een brede kennismaking met de bedrijfswetenschappen. Daarnaast wordt veel aandacht besteed aan wetenschappelijke methoden en technieken en academische en praktische vaardigheden. Later in het programma worden de gebieden accountancy en controlling geïntroduceerd. Vakgebieden die aan de orde komen zijn onder meer: organisatie en management, productiemanagement, statistiek, financial accounting, boekhouden, management accounting, internal control, financiering en recht. Al deze aspecten zijn van belang voor een goede sturing en beheersing van organisaties. De opleiding stimuleert een analytische en kritische benadering van meestal

10


interdisciplinaire organisatieproblemen en ontwikkelt kennis en vaardigheden om tot implementeerbare oplossingen te komen. Carrièreperspectieven Met het oog op je carrièreperspectieven is het zeer aan te bevelen na afronding van je bacheloropleiding de masteropleiding Accountancy of Controlling te volgen en eventueel de daarop aansluitende Executive Master of Accountancy (Registeraccountant) respectievelijk Executive Master of Finance and Control (Registercontroller). Gelet op het brede bedrijfswetenschappelijke profiel, biedt het bachelordiploma Accountancy en Controlling echter ook diverse mogelijkheden voor functies in profit- en non profit-organisaties. Hierbij moet in eerste instantie worden gedacht aan uitvoerende en ondersteunende functies op financieel-administratief gebied, zoals (bedrijfs)administrateur, assistent-controller, financieel-administratief beleidsmedewerker e.d. A.1.2.

Overzicht studieprogramma

V = Verplicht; K = Keuze; KG = Keuzegroep; EN = onderwijs wordt in het Engels gegeven; NL = onderwijs wordt in het Nederlands gegeven; zie ook de vakbeschrijvingen in Ocasys. Opleiding: Studiejaar:

BSc Accountancy & Controlling/A&C 3

sem 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1 1.2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1 2.2

vaknaam Financial Accounting II BE/A&C Internal Control: Grondslagen Ondernemingsrecht A&C/FE Voortgezet boekhouden Bachelorafstudeerwerkstuk A&C Spec. Course OMC: Management Acc. Theoretische inleid. Auditing & Control Business & ICT A&C

A.1.3.

Substitutie- en/of overgangsregeling

vakcode EBB915A10 EBB918A10 EBB901B05 EBB807A05 EBB924A10 EBB884A10 EBB943A05 EBB801A05

EC 10 10 5 5 10 10 5 5

V/K V V V V V V V V

taal NL NL NL NL NL EN NL NL

Zie hoofdstukken F.1.2 en F.1.3. A.1.4.

Regels en keuzes

Regels en keuzes BSc Accountancy & Controlling Toelatingseis post-propedeuse propedeuse Accountancy & Controlling Ingangseisen bachelorvakken

Zie de vakbeschrijvingen in Ocasys.

11


Ingangseisen bachelorafstudeerwerkstuk

definitieve toelating tot de postpropedeuse en het bachelorprogramma is goedgekeurd en 120 EC aan goedgekeurde vakken (inclusief propedeuse en vrijstellingen) is behaald, waaronder Business Research Methods BE/FE/A&C (EBB018A05) of Onderzoeksmethoden I & II (EBP616A05 & EBP625A04).

Goedkeuring vakkenpakket

Mastervoorlichting Doorstroommasters

Toelatingseis doorstroommasters Instroommomenten doorstroommaster

12

NB Deze regeling is van toepassing op alle studenten die staan ingeschreven voor de opleiding. Aanvragen via Progress, uiterlijk 6 weken vóór de start van het bachelorafstudeerwerkstuk. Zie ook de informatie op FEB-infonet. November en april/mei, met informatie over de twee profielen. MSc Accountancy & Controlling MSc Lerarenopleiding Economie & Bedrijfswetenschappen Voor toelating tot andere masters: verzoek naar de toelatingscommissie. BSc Accountancy & Controlling 1 september en 1 februari


A.2.

BSc Bedrijfseconomie

A.2.1.


Opleidingsdirecteur: dr. P.P.M. Smid, 050-363 3668, [email protected] Opleidingscoördinator: dr. C.A. Huijgen, 050-363 7206, [email protected] Secretariaat: mw. G. Pol, 050-363 3685, [email protected] Studieadvies: Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/bachelorstudent Taal: Nederlands Van de bacheloropleiding Bedrijfseconomie wordt in 2013-2014 alleen het derde jaar aangeboden, voor het laatst. Instromen als nieuwe student in de bacheloropleiding is dus niet meer mogelijk. Het eerste jaar van de bacheloropleiding Bedrijfseconomie is in het studiejaar 2011-2012 voor het laatst aangeboden. Voor de inhoud van de propedeuse wordt verwezen naar de studiegids 2011-2012. Het tweede studiejaar is in 2012-2013 voor het laatst verzorgd. Voor de inhoud van dat tweede jaar wordt verwezen naar de studiegids 2012-2013. Doel/inhoud De bacheloropleiding Bedrijfseconomie (BE) is een wetenschappelijke opleiding die zich bezighoudt met het economisch functioneren van organisaties. Deze opleiding biedt een academische vorming tot bedrijfseconoom, waarin naast het verwerven van gedegen wetenschappelijke kennis en inzicht op het bedrijfseconomische subdomein ook aandacht wordt besteed aan basiskennis op het algemeen economisch subdomein. Binnen het bedrijfseconomische gebied ligt het accent op onderwerpen als organisatiekunde, marketing, financiering en accounting. Onderwerpen die binnen het algemeen economisch subdomein aan de orde komen zijn bijvoorbeeld microeconomie en macro-economie. Door deze combinatie van bedrijfseconomie en algemene economie leren studenten het functioneren van organisaties zowel op een analytische, micro-economische wijze te benaderen, als in een macro- en internationaal economische context te plaatsen. Daarnaast wordt aandacht besteed aan recht en ICT. Om extra diepgang betreffende de oorspronkelijke bedrijfseconomische basisdisciplines te kunnen bereiken, is er binnen de opleiding veel ruimte voor ondersteunende gebieden zoals wiskunde en statistiek. Ook wordt ruim aandacht besteed aan het ontwikkelen van academische vaardigheden en een academische attitude en worden sociaal-communicatieve vaardigheden aangeleerd. De opleiding biedt studenten daarnaast de mogelijkheid zich internationaal te oriënteren. Daartoe bevat het programma een onderdeel Engels. Ook worden diverse vakken in het Engels verzorgd. Bij die vakken participeren diverse exchange studenten. Door deze aandacht voor de Engelse taal kunnen studenten ook een Engelstalige master volgen. In het derde studiejaar kunnen studenten zich verbreden via een minor in een ander domein dan het economische, een zgn. universitaire minor, of kiezen voor een minor die bedrijfseconomische verdieping aanbrengt, de zgn. facultaire minor. Het is ook

13


mogelijk een minor in het buitenland te doen. Zie voor meer informatie over de minorkeuze hoofdstuk A.9.1 van deze gids of de handleiding Minoren binnen de BSc Bedrijfseconomie, te vinden op de Nestor Community van de BSc Bedrijfseconomie. Het programma bevat verder een vakoverstijgende vaardighedenlijn die een logische opbouw vertoont en waarvoor geldt dat het afstudeerwerkstuk het sluitstuk vormt. De academische en sociaal-communicatieve vaardigheden en de attitude worden zo op een niveau gebracht dat behoort bij een academische bacheloropleiding. In het derde studiejaar wordt, via een gebonden keuze uit diverse vakken, de kennis van de verschillende basisdisciplines op het niveau gebracht dat gegeven de geambieerde eindkwalificaties noodzakelijk is. De inhoud van deze zogenoemde ‘specialization courses’ wordt deels gevoed door de onderzoekservaring van de docenten. Dit komt onder meer tot uiting in de papers die studenten moeten schrijven in het kader van die onderdelen. Ook schenken docenten expliciet aandacht aan (eigen) onderzoek op het terrein van de basisdiscipline. De afgestudeerde heeft op het terrein van de gekozen specialization courses een zodanige gespecialiseerde kennis verworven dat zonder moeite kan worden doorgestroomd naar de daaraan verwante bedrijfswetenschappelijke masteropleidingen. De afstudeeropdracht (het bachelorafstudeerwerkstuk) biedt goede koppelingsmogelijkheden tussen het onderzoek van de student en dat van de docenten. Door het volgen van een verbredende (universitaire) minor, dan wel – in het geval dat een verdiepende (facultaire) minor wordt gekozen – via een gerichte invulling van de keuzeruimte, kan in het derde jaar additionele academische breedheid worden verworven. Zie voor meer informatie over de minorkeuze paragraaf A.9.1 van deze gids en de ‘Minorenhandleiding BE’, te vinden onder de knop Studieinformatie op de Nestor Community van de BSc Bedrijfseconomie. Carrièreperspectieven Met het oog op je carrièreperspectieven is het aan te bevelen na afronding van je bacheloropleiding een aansluitende masteropleiding te volgen. De bacheloropleiding BE biedt een goede voorbereiding op de aansluitende masteropleidingen, die door FEB worden aangeboden, en voldoet aan internationaal geaccepteerde maatstaven. Daardoor zullen afgestudeerden ook relatief eenvoudig toegang kunnen krijgen tot andere nationale en internationale bedrijfswetenschappelijke masteropleidingen. Na voltooiing van de bacheloropleiding BE kunnen afgestudeerden werken in bedrijfseconomische functies waarbij analytisch en kritisch denken en handelen vereist zijn. In zijn algemeenheid kan worden gesteld dat een afgestudeerde van de bacheloropleiding BE een brede kennis heeft verworven van de diverse onderdelen van de bedrijfseconomie en derhalve in aanmerking komt voor een breed scala aan toekomstige functies. Hierbij kan in eerste instantie worden gedacht aan ondersteunende functies op een breed bedrijfseconomisch terrein in ‘profit’ en ‘nonprofit’ organisaties. Mede afhankelijk van de gevolgde keuzevakken in het derde jaar, kan het hierbij gaan om functies op het gebied van bijvoorbeeld het algemeen

14


management, het financieel management of het marketing management van organisaties, waarbij analytisch en kritisch denken en handelen vereist is. Door verdere studie en specialisatie en door het verkrijgen van werkervaring kunnen na verloop van tijd meer specialistische staffuncties of leidinggevende managementfuncties bereikbaar zijn. A.2.2.


V = Verplicht; K = Keuze; KG = Keuzegroep; EN = onderwijs wordt in het Engels gegeven; NL = onderwijs wordt in het Nederlands gegeven; zie ook de vakbeschrijvingen in Ocasys. Opleiding: Studiejaar: Profiel: sem 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 NB

BSc Bedrijfseconomie/BE 3 basisprogramma BSc BE

vaknaam buitenlandminor of facultaire minor of universitaire minor Bachelorafstudeerwerkstuk BE keuzevakken BSc BE (20 EC zie lijst) of vrije keuze post-propedeusevakken

·

· ·

· ·

·

·

vakcode

EBB926B10

EC 30 30 30 10 20 20

V/K KG KG KG V KG KG

taal EN

NL NL

Voor een universitaire minor kan gekozen worden uit het aanbod aan universitaire minoren dat te vinden is op de minorensite van de RUG. De gekozen minor mag geen substantiele overlap vertonen met de rest van het BE-programma. Voor een facultaire minor kan 30 EC aan vakken gekozen worden uit de lijst van derdejaars keuzevakken van de BSc BE (zie hieronder). Voor de buitenlandminor kan 30 EC aan postprodeutische vakken gekozen worden die geen substantiele overlap vertonen met de rest van het BE-programma. Hiervan mag maximaal 5 EC besteed worden aan een taalvak. Zie ook de facultaire website. Studenten met een universitaire minor of een buitenlandminor dienen twee vakken te volgen uit de lijst van derdejaars keuzevakken van de BSc BE (zie hieronder). Studenten met een facultaire minor dienen voor 20 EC aan post-propedeutische keuzevakken te volgen; die keuze is volledig vrij, mits er geen overlap ontstaat met andere onderdelen van het programma. Het Bachelorafstudeerwerkstuk kan zowel in het 1e als in het 2e semester gevolgd worden, mits de propedeuse en minimaal 60 EC van de post-propedeuse behaald zijn, waaronder Business Research Methods BE/FE/A&C (EBB018A05). Keuzevakken BE en vrije keuzevakken kunnen op elk moment van het jaar gevolgd worden.

15


Opleiding: Studiejaar: Profiel:

BSc Bedrijfseconomie/BE 3 keuzevakken BSc BE

sem 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2

vaknaam Financial Accounting II BE/A&C Spec. Course Business & ICT Spec. Course Finance Spec. Course Marketing Spec. Course OMC: Management Acc. Spec. Course Operations & Supply Chains Financial Accounting II BE/A&C Spec. Course Business & ICT Spec. Course Finance Spec. Course Marketing Spec. Course OMC: Management Acc. Spec. Course Operations & Supply Chains

A.2.3.

Substitutie- en/of overgangsregelingen

vakcode EBB915A10 EBB661A10 EBB881A10 EBB937A10 EBB884A10 EBB660A10 EBB915A10 EBB661A10 EBB881A10 EBB937A10 EBB884A10 EBB660A10

EC 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

V/K K K K K K K K K K K K K

taal NL EN EN EN EN EN NL EN EN EN EN EN

Zie hoofdstuk F.1.4. A.2.4.

Regels en keuzes

Regels en keuzes BSc Bedrijfseconomie Toelatingseis post-propedeuse propedeuse Bedrijfseconomie Ingangseisen bachelorvakken Ingangseisen bachelorafstudeerwerkstuk

Zie de vakbeschrijvingen in Ocasys. definitieve toelating tot de postpropedeuse en het bachelorprogramma is goedgekeurd en 120 EC aan goedgekeurde vakken (inclusief propedeuse en vrijstellingen) is behaald, waaronder Business Research Methods BE/FE/A&C (EBB018A05).


Mastervoorlichting

16

NB Deze regeling is van toepassing op alle studenten die staan ingeschreven voor de opleiding. Aanvragen via Progress, uiterlijk 6 weken voor de start van het bachelorafstudeerwerkstuk. Zie ook de informatie op FEB-infonet. November en april/mei.


Doorstroommasters

MSc Business Administration MSc Finance (met afgeronde SC Finance) MSc Human Resource Management MSc International Business & Management MSc International Economics & Business MSc International Financial Management MSc Marketing MSc Supply Chain Management MSc Technology and Operations Management MSc Lerarenopleiding Economie & Bedrijfswetenschappen Voor toelating tot andere masters: verzoek naar de toelatingscommissie. Toelatingseisen doorstroommasters BSc Bedrijfseconomie en (voor de Engelstalige masteropleidingen:) voldoende kennis van het Engels en (alleen voor de MSc Finance:) afgeronde Spec. Course Finance. Instroommomenten 1 september en 1 februari doorstroommasters

17


A.3.

BSc Bedrijfskunde

A.3.1.


Opleidingsdirecteur: prof.dr. J. de Vries, 050-363 3679, [email protected] Opleidingscoördinator: mw. dr. G.C. Ruel, 050-363 7314, [email protected] (Bedrijfskunde en track Technology Management) dr. E.P. Jansen, 050-363 3535, [email protected] (track Accountancy and Controlling) mw. dr. M.C. Achterkamp, 050-363 3686, [email protected] (track Business en

Management) Secretariaat: mw. M.A. Gorter-Bruinsma, 050-363 7529, en mw. I.C. Wieringa-van der Veen, 050- 363 3679, ([email protected]) Studieadvies: Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/bachelorstudent Nederlands: Nederlands Doel/inhoud De bacheloropleiding Bedrijfskunde is een interdisciplinaire, wetenschappelijke en praktijkgerichte opleiding met ruime aandacht voor vaardigheden die in de beroepspraktijk van belang zijn. De opleiding stelt studenten in de gelegenheid om een brede academische vorming op te doen met betrekking tot het functioneren van en het ingrijpen in organisaties. De opleiding vormt in de eerste plaats een kennismaking met de bedrijfswetenschappelijke disciplines en de belangrijkste functionele gebieden. Inzicht in de samenhang tussen deze gebieden, een integratieve benadering, de relatie met de externe omgeving en aandacht voor technologische, financiële en organisatieveranderingsprocessen zijn daarbij belangrijke aandachtspunten. De opleiding is praktijkgericht in die zin dat er veel aandacht wordt besteed aan het leren toepassen van wetenschappelijke kennis bij het oplossen van organisatievraagstukken. Hierbij behoort ook het versterken van sociale en communicatieve vaardigheden van studenten. Als afgestudeerde bachelor ben je een bedrijfskundige professional die beschikt over een wetenschappelijke houding en die probleem- en oplossingsgericht werkt. Opbouw van het programma De bacheloropleiding kent een driejarig studieprogramma dat is opgebouwd uit een propedeutische fase (het eerste studiejaar) en een postpropedeutische fase (het tweede en derde studiejaar). De propedeuse heeft een oriënterende functie waarbij een kennismaking met de verschillende bedrijfsprocessen het vertrekpunt vormt. Belangrijke basiswetenschappen waarmee de student in de propedeuse kennis maakt zijn onder meer: organisatiekunde, gedragswetenschappen, financial accounting, informatiekunde en supply chain operations. Het propedeuseprogramma kent naast reguliere vakken enkele practica waarin wetenschappelijke methoden, technieken en vaardigheden worden getraind. In het tweede en derde studiejaar worden de studieonderdelen die in het eerste jaar zijn aangeboden verdiept en in samenhang toegepast. Naast een algemeen verplicht

18


deel van 90 EC (inclusief propedeuse), kent de bacheloropleiding Bedrijfskunde daartoe een drietal tracks van ieder 90 EC. In het tweede studiejaar dient dan ook een keuze gemaakt te worden uit één van de volgende tracks: Accountancy & Controlling, Business & Management of Technology Management. Middels het volgen van één van deze drie tracks worden studenten van het bachelorprogramma in staat gesteld om zich verder te specialiseren in één van de deelgebieden binnen de bedrijfskunde. De track Accountancy and Controlling richt zich op de betrouwbaarheid van informatie voor de besturing van organisaties en voor het afleggen van verantwoording over het gevoerde beleid aan de interne en externe stakeholders. Naast algemeen bedrijfskundige vakken zijn de vakken binnen de track accountancy en controlling er dan ook op gericht om studenten wetenschappelijke kennis van, inzicht in en vaardigheden op het gebied van accountancy en controlling bij te brengen. Naast de grondslagen van onder meer internal control, auditing en corporate governance, biedt de track een verdieping van de basiskennis op het gebied van management accounting, financial accounting, en financiering. De track Accountancy & Controlling biedt primair de basis voor een masteropleiding Accountancy of Controlling en de daarop aansluitende (theoretische) postinitiële opleidingen voor Registeraccountant respectievelijk Registercontroller. De track Technology Management combineert een gedegen inzicht in de bedrijfswetenschappen met een verdieping in technologische vraagstukken. Daardoor ontstaat een goede basis voor het verrichten van onderzoek naar het functioneren en verbeteren van processen in organisaties. De vakken binnen de track Technology Management richten zich dan ook op het raakvlak van management en techniek. Studenten die de track Technology Management gevolgd hebben, kunnen complexe bedrijfsproblemen waar techniek een belangrijke rol speelt modelleren, analyseren, oplossingen aandragen en deze ook realiseren. Binnen de track Business & Management wordt naast een verdieping in de verschillende bedrijfswetenschappelijke disciplines speciale aandacht besteed aan sociale processen binnen organisaties. Vakken als Management en Organisatie, Organisatieverandering, Human Resource Management en Strategisch Management nemen dan ook een centrale plaats in binnen deze track. Studenten die de track Business & Management hebben gevolgd zijn dan ook in staat om complexe bedrijfsprocessen te doorgronden en kunnen deze koppelen aan sociale (veranderings)processen binnen een organisatie. Het derde studiejaar van het programma staat, afhankelijk van de track die gevolgd wordt, in het teken van integratie en individuele professionalisering middels een Minor van 30 EC. Daarbij kan gekozen worden voor een universitaire (verbredende) minor, een facultaire (verdiepende) minor of een buitenlandminor. Zie voor meer informatie over de minorkeuze paragraaf A.9.1 van deze gids of de handleiding ‘Minoren Bachelor Bedrijfskunde’, te vinden op de Nestor Community van de BSc Bedrijfskunde. Het derde jaar wordt afgesloten met het schrijven van een werkstuk. Door het schrijven van een bachelorafstudeerwerkstuk wordt getoetst of de student

19


op een zelfstandige en wetenschappelijk verantwoorde wijze een bedrijfskundig onderzoek kan uitvoeren. Gedetailleerde informatie over de bacheloropleiding Bedrijfskunde staat op de Nestor community BSc Bedrijfskunde. Naast actuele informatie over het programma zijn op deze community ook goedkeuringsregelingen en informatie over de organisatie van de opleiding te vinden. Verder kun je op de Nestor community meer informatie te vinden over het volgen van vakken aan buitenlandse universiteiten en de track-specifieke vakken. Carrièreperspectieven Met het oog op je carrièreperspectieven is het aan te bevelen na afronding van je bacheloropleiding een aansluitende masteropleiding te volgen. Als afgestudeerde bedrijfskundige kom je na het behalen van een masterdiploma op zeer uiteenlopende functies terecht. Afhankelijk van je masteropleiding valt hierbij te denken aan functies op het gebied van human resource management (bijvoorbeeld personeelsadviseur), marketing (bijvoorbeeld productmanager), financieel beleid (bijvoorbeeld controller), productie en logistiek (bijvoorbeeld inkoopmanager), kwaliteit (bijvoorbeeld kwaliteitsfunctionaris), informatie- en communicatietechnologie (bijvoorbeeld ICT-adviseur) en organisatieadvisering (bijvoorbeeld consultant). A.3.2.


V = Verplicht; K = Keuze; KG = Keuzegroep; EN = onderwijs wordt in het Engels gegeven; NL = onderwijs wordt in het Nederlands gegeven; zie ook de vakbeschrijvingen in Ocasys. Opleiding: Studiejaar: Profiel: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2

20

BSc Bedrijfskunde/Bdk 1 basisprogramma BSc Bdk

vaknaam Management Science Marketing BDK Organisatie en technologie BDK Gedrag in organisaties Statistiek BDK Supply Chain Operations Academic Skills I Financial Accounting BDK Informatiemanagement BDK Academic Skills II Management Accounting BDK Organisatie en omgeving

vakcode EBP025A05 EBP027A05 EBP618B05 EBP607A05 EBP624B05 EBP029A05 EBP021A05 EBP023A05 EBP024A05 EBP022A05 EBP026A05 EBP028A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

V/K V V V V V V V V V V V V

taal NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL


Opleiding: Studiejaar: Profiel: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2

vaknaam Financial Management BDK Internal Control (BSc) Kwantitatieve onderzoeksmethoden Accounting for Management Control Boekhouden A&C Kwalitatieve onderzoeksmethoden Financial Reporting and Consolidation Ontwerpmethodologie Recht BDK Advanced Financial Accounting Financiering A&C Introduction to Auditing

Opleiding: Studiejaar: Profiel: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2

vakcode EBB046A05 EBB048A05 EBB051A05 EBB078A05 EBB017B05 EBB050A05 EBB047A05 EBB052A05 EBB053A05 EBB045A05 EBB823C05 EBB049A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

V/K V V V V V V V V V V V V

taal NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL EN

vakcode EBB046A05 EBB051A05 EBB054A05 EBB078A05 EBB050A05 EBB644B05 EBB617B05 EBB052A05 EBB053A05 EBB055A05 EBB711C05 EBB649C05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

V/K V V V C V V V V V V V V

taal NL NL NL NL NL NL EN NL NL NL NL EN

vakcode EBB046A05 EBB051A05 EBB059A05 EBB050A05

EC 5 5 5 5

V/K V V V V

taal NL NL NL NL

BSc Bedrijfskunde/Bdk 2 Business & Management/B&M

vaknaam Financial Management BDK Kwantitatieve onderzoeksmethoden Management- en Organisatietheorie Accounting for Management Control Kwalitatieve onderzoeksmethoden Operations Management B&M/TM Human Resource Management B&M Ontwerpmethodologie Recht BDK Marktcontext en marktonderzoek Organisatieverandering en Leiderschap Strategic Management B&M

Opleiding: Studiejaar: Profiel: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2

BSc Bedrijfskunde/Bdk 2 Accountancy & Controlling/A&C

BSc Bedrijfskunde/Bdk 2 Technology Management/TM

vaknaam Financial Management BDK Kwantitatieve onderzoeksmethoden Technologiemanagement Kwalitatieve onderzoeksmethoden

21


1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2

Logistieke informatiesystemen Operations Management B&M/TM Ontwerpmethodologie Recht BDK Work Organization and Job Design Applied Manufacturing Research Management of Product Innovation Production Planning & Quality Control

Opleiding: Studiejaar: Profiel: sem 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.2 2.2

sem 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2

22

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

V V V V V V V V

NL NL NL NL EN NL EN EN

vakcode

EC 30 30 30 10 10 5 5

V/K KG KG KG V V V V

taal EN

V/K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K

taal EN NL EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN NL NL EN EN EN EN

BSc Bedrijfskunde/Bdk 3 basisprogramma BSc Bdk

vaknaam buitenlandminor of facultaire minor of universitaire minor Bachelorafstudeerwerkstuk Bedrijfskunde specialization course (zie lijst) Economisch recht Bedrijfskunde Management Game


EBB057A05 EBB644B05 EBB052A05 EBB053A05 EBB601B05 EBB056A05 EBB652B05 EBB058A05

EBB731A10 EBB613A05 EBB637A05

NL EN NL NL

BSc Bedrijfskunde/Bdk 3 keuzevakken BSc Bdk

vaknaam English Course for Business Admin. Informaticarecht voor niet-juristen Spec. Course Business & ICT Spec. Course Finance Spec. Course Marketing Spec. Course OMC: Management Acc. Spec. Course Operations & Supply Chains Spec. Course Small Bus.&Entrepreneurship Spec. Course Strategy & Innovation Man. Foreign Dir. Investment, Trade & Geogr. Healthcare Management Managementvaardigheden Ontwikkeling competenties Project Management Purchasing Management E-Business Knowledge Management

vakcode EBB614B05 RGARI70110 EBB661A10 EBB881A10 EBB937A10 EBB884A10 EBB660A10 EBB887A10 EBB658B10 EBB037A05 EBB732A05 EBB697A05 EBB896A05 EBB667A05 EBB742A05 EBB666A05 EBB724B05

EC 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5


1.2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 NB

Sports Economics Alg. Economie voor de Lerarenopl. English Course for Business Admin. Spec. Course Business & ICT Spec. Course Finance Spec. Course Marketing Spec. Course OMC: Management Acc. Spec. Course Operations & Supply Chains Spec. Course Small Bus.&Entrepreneurship Spec. Course Strategy & Innovation Man. Business & Supply Chain Marketing Knowledge Management & Innovation Ontwerpen van bedrijfskundige systemen Quality Management Work Organization and Job Design Ethics and International Business

EBB920A05 EBB077A10 EBB614B05 EBB661A10 EBB881A10 EBB937A10 EBB884A10 EBB660A10 EBB887A10 EBB658B10 EBB609A05 EBB723B05 TBOBS-11 EBB669A05 EBB601B05 EBB608B05

5 10 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 5

K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K

EN NL EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN NL EN EN EN

Voor studenten van de bacheloropleiding Bedrijfskunde is het niet toegestaan om de English Course for Business Administration op te nemen als onderdeel van een facultaire minor.


BSc Bedrijfskunde/Bdk 3 specialization courses BSc Bdk

sem 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2

vaknaam Spec. Course Business & ICT Spec. Course Finance Spec. Course Marketing Spec. Course OMC: Management Acc. Spec. Course Operations & Supply Chains Spec. Course Small Bus.&Entrepreneurship Spec. Course Strategy & Innovation Man.

A.3.3.


vakcode EBB661A10 EBB881A10 EBB937A10 EBB884A10 EBB660A10 EBB887A10 EBB658B10

EC 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

V/K K K K K K K K

taal EN EN EN EN EN EN EN

Zie hoofdstuk F.1.5, F.1.6, F.1.7 en F.1.8. A.3.4.

Regels en keuzes

Regels en keuzes BSc Bedrijfskunde Eerstejaars voorlichting februari en april/mei, met informatie over keuze 2e jaar Toelatingseis post-propedeuse propedeuse Bedrijfskunde

23


Eisen voor voorlopige toelating tot (het eerste jaar van) de postpropedeuse, tijdens het tweede jaar van inschrijving.

Overstap naar de postpropedeuse vanuit de propedeuse van een andere opleiding

Ingangseisen bachelorvakken Ingangseisen Management Game


24

Voldoen aan de BSA-norm, d.w.z. 45 EC van het propedeutisch programma is behaald. Voor meer informatie over het Bindend Studieadvies (BSA): zie par. 9.3 e.v. van de BSc-OER en/of par. 1.4.2 van het algemene deel van deze gids. Vanuit de propedeuses van A&C BE E&BE Fiscale Economie IB/IB&M Technology Management is toelating tot de postpropedeuse van Bedrijfskunde mogelijk nadat is voldaan aan aanvullende eisen. Zie par. 5.3 van de BScOER. NB Studenten die willen overstappen naar de postpropedeuse van Bedrijfskunde wordt aangeraden ingeschreven te blijven bij de opleiding waar zij hun propedeuse hebben behaald, totdat zij aan de aanvullende eisen hebben voldaan. Wie toch eerder wil overstappen naar Bedrijfskunde, moet zich inschrijven als propedeusestudent bij Bedrijfskunde en valt als zodanig onder de Numerus-Fixusregeling voor Bedrijfskunde. Neem bij twijfel contact op met het admissions office ([email protected]). Zie de vakbeschrijvingen in Ocasys. Wie wil deelnemen aan het Management Game moet uiterlijk 4 weken vóór aanvang van het Game: definitief zijn toegelaten tot de postpropedeuse en 40 EC van het eerste postpropedeutische jaar hebben behaald. definitieve toelating tot de postpropedeuse en het bachelorprogramma is goedgekeurd en 120 EC aan goedgekeurde vakken (inclusief propedeuse en vrijstellingen) is behaald.



Mastervoorlichting

NB Deze regeling is van toepassing op alle studenten die staan ingeschreven voor de opleiding. Aanvragen via Progress, uiterlijk 6 weken vóór de start van het bachelorafstudeerwerkstuk. Zie ook de informatie op FEB-infonet. November en april/mei.

Doorstroommasters

MSc Accountancy & Controlling (alleen voor BDK- track A&C, voor de overige tracks gelden aanvullende eisen) MSc Business Administration MSc Finance (met afgeronde SC Finance) MSc Human Resource Management MSc International Business & Management MSc International Economics & Business MSc International Financial Management MSc Marketing MSc Supply Chain Management MSc Technology and Operations Management MSc Lerarenopleiding Economie & Bedrijfswetenschappen Voor toelating tot andere masters: verzoek naar de toelatingscommissie. Toelatingseisen doorstroommasters BSc Bedrijfskunde en (voor de Engelstalige masteropleidingen:) voldoende kennis van het Engels, en (alleen voor de MSc Finance:) afgeronde Spec. Course Finance. Instroommoment(en) 1 september en 1 februari doorstroommasters

25


A.4.

BSc Econometrics and Operations Research

A.4.1.


Programme Director: Prof. M.H. van der Vlerk, [email protected], 050-363 3816 Programme Coordinator: Dr P. Heijnen, [email protected], 050-363 2317 Secretary: Mrs E.M. Baars-Drent, [email protected] and/or Mrs M.A. Koolman, [email protected], 050-363 7018 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/bachelorstudent Language: English Objectives and content The Bachelor of Science programme Econometrics and Operations Research (EOR) concerns the modelling approach to the description and analysis of issues in the areas of economics, management and related fields. The main objectives of the programme are acquiring knowledge of the most important models presently in use, the necessary background in mathematics and statistics and developing a researchoriented attitude. Training of the ability to translate the findings of this modelling approach into results relevant for the application area is an integrated part of the programme. To reach these objectives, in the first year and in the first part of the second year the focus is on mathematics and statistics. Other subjects in the first two years are introductory courses on the main areas of EOR, i.e. economics and programming. The mainstream subjects of the programme are dealt with in the second and third year: operations research, actuarial science, econometrics and mathematical economics. The final semester of the programme consists on the one hand of a bachelor thesis in completion of the bachelor programme, and on the other hand of the opportunity to prepare the student for one of the profiles of the master programme Econometrics, Operations Research and Actuarial Studies. Elective courses offer the opportunity to broaden one’s knowledge of the economic application areas. To establish a connection between the scientific nature of the programme and the working environment of the EOR bachelor, assignments and case studies play an important role in the programme. Taking part in the programme at a foreign university is encouraged. The programme aims at both Dutch and foreign students. The language of instruction is English. Throughout the programme, support is provided to ensure that academic writing and English language skills reach the required level. Career prospects To enhance your career prospects, we strongly recommend that you take one of the two follow-on Master’s degree programmes after completing your bachelor degree.

26


So far, almost all BSc EOR students have continued their studies at the master level. Consequently, there is only limited information on job perspectives for BSc EOR graduates. Other sources, though, suggest that job perspectives for BSc EOR graduates remain very good. Banks, insurance companies and consultancy firms offer good prospects. In addition, more traditional employers such as the CBS and the government continue to hire BSc EOR graduates. Through further study and specialization, for instance by completing a master programme, one can aim for a more research-oriented career, for instance as a PhD student. This does not have to be restricted to a subject in the area of econometrics, operations research, actuarial science, mathematical economics or statistics, but it could also be in economics, management, logistics, or one of the social sciences. A.4.2.

Degree programme

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2

course title Finance for EOR Mathematics I for EOR Microeconomics for EOR Mathematics II for EOR OR Modelling Probability Theory for EOR Multivariate Calculus Probability Distributions Programming for EOR Estimation and Testing Linear Algebra for EOR Statistical Modelling for EOR

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2

BSc Econometrics and Operations Research/EOR 1 core programme BSc EOR code EBP801B05 EBP011B05 EBP841B05 EBP012B05 EBP821B05 EBP014B05 EBP013B05 EBP038A05 EBP039A05 EBP036A05 EBP037A05 EBP008B05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C/E C C C C C C C C C C C C

lang EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN

C/E C C C C C

lang EN EN EN EN EN

BSc Econometrics and Operations Research/EOR 2 core programme BSc EOR

course title Macroeconomics for EOR Matrices, Graphs and Convexity Statistical Inference Difference- & Differential Equations Introduction to Operations Research

code EBB027B05 EBB073A05 EBB075A05 EBB812A05 EBB829A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5

27


1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2

Linear Models in Statistics Introduction to Actuarial Science Introduction to Econometrics Queueing Theory and Simulation Dynamic Econometrics (for EOR year 2) Introduction to Mathematical Economics Risk Insurance (for EOR year 2)

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.2

sem 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1 A.4.3.

5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C C C C C C C

EN EN EN EN EN EN EN

C/E C C C C C C C C

lang EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN

C/E E E E

lang EN EN EN

BSc Econometrics and Operations Research/EOR 3 core programme BSc EOR

course title Game Theory Quantitative Finance (BSc) Stochastic Models Dynamic Econometrics (for EOR year 3) Risk Insurance (for EOR year 3) elective BSc EOR (see list) suitable course(s) FEB (s.t. approval) Bachelor’s Thesis EOR

Programme: Year: Profile:

EBB072A05 EBB827A05 EBB828A05 EBB074A05 EBB813A05 EBB830A05 EBB863A05

code EBB872A05 EBB839A05 EBB878A06 EBB813A07 EBB863A07

EBB925A10

EC 5 5 6 7 7 5 15 10

BSc Econometrics and Operations Research/EOR 3 electives BSc EOR

course title Spec. Course Applied Operations Research Spec. Course Microeconometrics Spec. Course Generalized Linear Models

code EBB888A10 EBB880B10 EBB883A05

EC 10 10 5

Substitution and/or transition regulations

See Section F.1.9. A.4.4.

Rules and choices

Rules and Choices BSc in Econometrics and Operations Research First-year information day October (FEB) and January (EOR) Entry requirements for the postpropaedeutic phase

28

Propaedeutic certificate in Econometrics and Operations Research


Provisional entry requirements for (the first year of) the postpropaedeutic phase, during the second year of registration.

Entry requirements for Bachelor’s courses Entry requirements for the Bachelor’s Thesis

Students must have passed the BSA threshold, i.e. earned 45 ECs or more during the first year of registration in the propaedeutic phase. For more information about the Binding Study Advice (BSA): section 9.3 ff of the BSc OER and/or section 2.4.2 of the General Information part of this student handbook. Consult the course descriptions in Ocasys. Definitive admission to the postpropaedeutic phase and the Bachelor’s programme has been approved and

Approval of the Bachelor’s programme Master’s information days Follow-on Master’s degree programmes

Entry requirements for the followon Master’s degree programmes

120 ECs from the approved courses (including propaedeutic courses and exemptions) have been earned. N.B. This regulation applies to all students registered for the degree programme. Apply via Progress, no later than 6 weeks before starting the Bachelor’s thesis. See the information on the FEB infonet. November (FEB) and February (EOR) MSc in Econometrics, Operations and Actuarial Studies (EORAS) MSc in Business Administration MSc in Economics MSc in International Business & Management MSc in International Economics & Business MSc in Marketing MSc in Supply Chain Management MSc in Technology and Operations Management MSc in Teaching Economics and Business Studies (in Dutch) For admission to other Master’s programmes: submit an application to the Admissions Board Bachelor’s degree in Econometrics and Operations Research and (for the English taught Master’s programmes:) sufficient command of English.

29


Starting dates for the follow-on Master’s degree programmes

30

1 September (preferred) and 1 February.


A.5.

BSc Economics and Business Economics

A.5.1.


Programme Director: Prof. L. Schoonbeek, [email protected], 050-363 3798 Programme Coordinators: Dr E.H. van Leeuwen, [email protected], 050-363 3744 (E&BE first year and IE&B specialization) Dr P.P.M. Smid, [email protected], 050-363 3668 (Business Economics Prof. J.P. Elhorst, [email protected], 050-363 3893 (Economics specialization) Secretary: E&BE first year and IE&B specialization: [email protected], 050-363 3458 Business Economics specialization and Economics specialization: [email protected], 050-363 7018 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/bachelorstudent Language: English Note: unless stated otherwise, the text below applies to the new BSc E&BE programme, which started in September 2012. See Section B.2.1 of the Handbook 2011-2012 for the text corresponding to the previous BSc E&BE programme. Objectives and content The BSc programme in Economics and Business Economics (E&BE) aims to provide a solid academic and internationally oriented training, combining insights from business economics, (international) economics and international business, developing a research-oriented attitude, and reaching an advanced level of English language skills. The scientific domain of the BSc consists of the fields of business economics (with an emphasis on finance) and (international) economic theory and policy, as well as the related fields of the theory of (international) institutions and of multinational enterprises. In the second BSc-year you choose a specialization in either Business Economics, Economics, or International Economics & Business. Depending on the choice made, graduates will be able to demonstrate relevant knowledge and understanding of: ‘Business Economics’- this encompasses the economic functioning of individual organizations (both profit and non-profit), and the behaviour of people in those organizations. Topics considered include financial and accounting decisions of organizations, and the relation between these decisions and the functioning of financial markets, as well as problems related to marketing, operations and logistics, and human resource management. ‘Economics’- this encompasses a wide range of factors related to human choice under conditions of scarcity. These factors include economic, environmental, political, technological and ethical factors, together with effects on local, national and international (economic) policy and upon strategy and behaviour of organizations in markets. ‘International Economics and Business’ – this encompasses the interaction of multinational firms and their economic environment. The economic environment includes first of all the global and national economy, but also differences in

31


institutions and policies between countries. This requires on the one hand the analysis of strategic decision making by multinational firms in relation to global economic developments and different country characteristics, and on the other hand the analysis of the international economy taking into account the effects of e.g. location and investment decisions by multinational firms. Upon completion of the BSc E&BE (all three specializations), you can directly access the following Master’s degree programmes that are closely related to the Bachelor’s programme: MSc Finance, MSc Economics, and MSc International Economics and Business. You also have access to a number of other Master’s degree programmes offered by FEB. The level and study load of the E&BE programme are comparable to foreign equivalents, and therefore a BSc degree in E&BE also allows access to other (inter)national Master’s degree programmes. Business Economics specialization The Business Economics specialization offers a high-quality practical and theoretical academic foundation for any professional in the field. The focus is on core subjects of business economics, such as finance, accounting, marketing, operations and logistics, and human resource management. In addition you are taught solid general economic theory, which is essential in the field of business economics. Via this combination of business and economics courses you learn to view the functioning of organizations from an analytic, microeconomic point of view in a macro - and international economic context also. You will receive ample training in mathematics, statistics, applied econometrics, and (business) research skills in order to be able to conduct individual academic research in business economics. In addition, you will receive solid training in academic writing through writing several theoretical and empirical papers and, finally, the bachelor’s thesis. In the third year of your study you take two core courses in corporate finance and financial markets leading to upper intermediate academic knowledge of this aspect of business economics. Accordingly, after graduation with a specialization in business economics you are especially able to apply the acquired knowledge in these areas. Economics specialization The Economics specialization offers a high-quality practical and theoretical foundation for any profession in this field. The focus on both theory and practice prepares you for professional life. First, you are taught high-level general economic theory, which is essential for any profession in the field of economic policy or research. You take core courses in both Macroeconomics and Microeconomics. Second, the curriculum concentrates on the application of theory to practice, e.g. in the Bachelor’s thesis. The writing of the Bachelor’s thesis also helps to develop analytical and communication skills (through the thesis seminar, in which you learn to present, defend and give feedback). Economists focus primarily on economic theory and policy. Most fundamentally, the BSc programme deals with individual consumer and producer behaviour as well as characteristics of national economies. In addition, topics such as banking, the origins

32


of economic growth, economic differences between countries and regions, the role of technological development and innovation, and a broad range of public and monetary policy issues are dealt with. International Economics and Business specialization (IE&B) The IE&B specialization offers solid academic training with a strongly international profile and a focus on the integration of international economics and international business strategy. The core of the specialization consists of courses in both International Business and International Economics. International Business concentrates on the main characteristics and activities of international corporations. These include strategic management, e.g. how strategic decision-making of multinational enterprises is affected by national economic, social, political and cultural environments, the implications for competitive positioning, entry and establishment in foreign markets and international strategic alliances. International economics deals with analyses of the global economy in which multinationals operate : for example,the determinants of international patterns of trade and specialization, the competitiveness of nations versus that of firms and the policy options to strengthen competitiveness, the effects of trade policy, theories of exchange rates and of the balance-of-payments, international capital flows, and financial crises and the international monetary system. Studying Abroad To enhance the international profile of the E&BE programme, the third year of the BSc programme includes (the opportunity for) a semester abroad. You can make use of the extended exchange network of the Faculty with several European and nonEuropean universities. You can select courses offered by the host university in consultation with the E&BE coordinators. Because of compulsory courses in the second semester, the study abroad period for students studying E&BE is in the first semester of the third year. For students in the IE&B specialization, the study abroad is compulsory; for students in Economics, it is optional. You need to take the initiative in making your own arrangements. It is strongly recommended to start planning well ahead of time. You need to apply in advance for approval of the subjects you wish to study abroad. To be eligible for one of the Faculty’s exchange programmes for studying abroad, you must have completed all first year courses. It is strongly recommended that you have also completed (most of) the second year at the time you are leaving in order to be able to take courses at the required level during the semester abroad. Please note: if you wish to study at a university which does not offer courses in English, the preparation to attain the required language skills should be started well in advance. As indicated above, you can only be selected for a ‘study abroad’ place if you have completed your first year of study. For most universities the first selection is in March, in semester 2.1 (but for some universities the selection is much earlier). A final selection round for remaining ‘study abroad’ positions takes place after the exams of semester 2.1. This means that if you have not completed the 1st year courses

33


of semester 2.2 (including English for E&BE and Research Paper for E&BE) in the previous year, you are not eligible for studying abroad as there are no more resits for these courses before the final selection round starts. Study progress and grades will be taken into account in the selection procedure. In all cases, the programme of the ‘study abroad’ has to be approved by the E&BE programme management: Dr P.P.M. Smid for Business Economics; Prof. J.P. Elhorst for Economics; and Dr E.H. van Leeuwen for IE&B. If you have participated in higher education outside the Netherlands before starting your study in E&BE (IE&B specialization) you can apply for an exemption from the compulsory ‘study abroad’ period via the Student Support Desk. If granted, you must contact Dr E.H. van Leeuwen, programme coordinator of IE&B, for a substitute programme. If you would like to know more about the opportunities for studying abroad, you are welcome to come to the Student Support Desk, or visit the website. Career prospects Although students have the option to enter the labour market after graduation from the E&BE bachelor, the vast majority of the students, however, choose to pursue a relevant master. We strongly recommend that you do so. From a professional perspective, requirements are relatively broad and general, both in terms of content and in terms of academic skills and attitude. As part of the programme, guest lecturers are regularly invited to discuss their professional experiences and to explain how their work is related to the specific course topics. Students are also made familiar with various aspects of professional practice through a rather intensive and, mostly extra-curricular programme. The student association EBF is very active in organizing workshops, excursions, guest lectures, congresses, projects, etc. In addition, students may come into contact with the profession through FEB Careers Office that offers a large portfolio of short and longer internships. A.5.2.

Degree programme

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1

34

BSc Economics and Business Economics/E&BE 1 core programme BSc E&BE

course title International Business for E&BE Mathematics for E&BE

code EBP808C05 EBP817B05

EC 5 5

C/E lang C EN C EN


1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2

Microeconomics for E&BE: Consumers&Firms Financial Accounting for E&BE Macroeconomics for E&BE Mathematics and Data Analysis for E&BE English for E&BE Research Paper for E&BE Marketing for E&BE Statistics for E&BE Asset Pricing and Capital Budgeting International Economics for E&BE

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2

sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2

5

C

EN

EBP802B05 EBP812B05 EBP034A05 EBP837B05 EBP035A05 EBP033A05 EBP822B05 EBP032A05 EBP810B05

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C C C C C C C C C

EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN



C/E C C C C C C C C C C

lang EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN

BSc Economics and Business Economics/E&BE 2 Business Economics

course title Foreign Dir. Investment & Trade for E&BE International Macroeconomics Matrix Analysis and Optimization Management Accounting for BE Microeconomics - Industrial Organization Operations and Logistics Management Capital Structure and Financial Planning Econometrics for BE Human Resource Management for BE Economics of Banking Empirical Research Paper for BE Philosophy and Ethics of Business


EBP819B05

code EBB064A05 EBB841B05 EBB066A05 EBB846C05 EBB067A05 EBB068A05 EBB060A05 EBB061A05 EBB065A05 EBB062A05 EBB063A05 EBB069A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

BSc Economics and Business Economics/E&BE 2 Economics

course title Foreign Dir. Investment & Trade for E&BE International Macroeconomics Matrix Analysis and Optimization Intermediate Mathematics Microeconomics - Industrial Organization Public Finance Capital Structure and Financial Planning Econometrics for Economics Growth, Institutions and Business Economics of Banking

code EBB064A05 EBB841B05 EBB066A05 EBB933B05 EBB067A05 EBB861A05 EBB060A05 EBB814A05 EBB022A05 EBB062A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

35


2.2 2.2

Empirical Research Paper for Economics History of Economic Thought


sem 1.1-2

NB

·

·

36

C C

EN EN

code EBB064A05 EBB841B05 EBB066A05 EBB921B05 EBB023B05 EBB067A05 EBB060A05 EBB070A05 EBB022A05 EBB062A05 EBB071A05 EBB069A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5



BSc Economics and Business Economics/E&BE 3 Economics

course title faculty minor E&BE-Economics (see below) or study abroad (= foreign minor) Bachelor’s Thesis Economics elective(s) FEB Macroeconomics III Microeconomics III

1.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1

5 5

BSc Economics and Business Economics/E&BE 2 International Economics & Business/IE&B

course title Foreign Dir. Investment & Trade for E&BE International Macroeconomics Matrix Analysis and Optimization Global Development Studies International Business Strategy for IE&B Microeconomics - Industrial Organization Capital Structure and Financial Planning Econometrics for IE&B Growth, Institutions and Business Economics of Banking Empirical Research Paper for IE&B Philosophy and Ethics of Business


EBB020B05 EBB934A05

code

EBB908A10 EBB842A05 EBB852A05

EC 30

C/E lang EG EN

30 10 10 5 5

EG C C C C

EN EN EN EN EN

The study abroad programme (foreign minor) can contain a maximum of 5 ECs in non-economic and non-business courses, including no more than one language course in the language of the foreign university (maximum 5 ECs). Students choose 10 ECs from ‘electives FEB’ and/or 3rd year courses from other bachelor’s and/or 2nd year courses from BSc EOR-2 that do not overlap with the Economics curriculum.


Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2

course title Spec. Course Finance Spec. Course Political Economics History of Economic Thought Environmental Economics or Labour Economics or Spatial economics

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 NB

A.5.3.

BSc Economics and Business Economics/E&BE 3 faculty minor E&BE-Economics code EBB881A10 EBB886A10 EBB934A05 EBB898A05 EBB840A05 GEMSPECON

EC 10 10 5 5 5 5

C/E C C C EG EG EG

lang EN EN EN EN EN EN

C/E C C C EG EG EG


BSc Economics and Business Economics/E&BE 3 International Economics & Business/IE&B

course title study abroad (= foreign minor) Bachelor’s Thesis IE&B Spec. Course IE&B 3rd year course(s) in Economics or Development Economics or Spec. Course other than SC IE&B

code EBB879A10 EBB029A10 EBB811A10

EC 30 10 10 10 10 10

The study abroad programme (foreign minor) can contain a maximum of 15 ECs in noneconomic and non-business courses, including no more than one language course in the language of the foreign university (maximum 5 ECs)..


See Section F.1.10, F.1.11 en F.1.12. A.5.4.

Rules and choices

Rules and Choices BSc in Economics and Business Economics First-year information day October Entry requirements for the postpropaedeutic phase Provisional entry requirements for (the first year of) the postpropaedeutic phase, during the second year of registration.

Propaedeutic certificate in Economics and Business Economics. Students must have passed the BSA threshold, i.e. earned 45 ECs or more during the first year of registration in the propaedeutic phase. For more information about the Binding Study Advice (BSA): section 9.3 ff of the BSc OER and/or section 2.4.2 of the General Information part of this student handbook.

37


Entry requirements for the postIt is also possible to be admitted to the postpropaedeutic phase for students propaedeutic phase with a propaedeutic with a propaedeutic certificate from certificate in another degree programme A&C BE Business Administration EOR Economics of Taxation IB/IB&M once additional requirements have been met. See section 5.5 of the BSc OER. NB Students who wish to transfer to E&BE and have passed one of the propaedeutic examinations mentioned above, have to register as propaedeutic E&BE student. They will be provisionally admitted to the post-propaedeutic phase for a maximum of one year. The provisional admittance will be converted into definitive admission as soon as the addititonal requirements have been met. Entry requirements for Bachelor’s Consult the course descriptions in Ocasys. courses The ‘study abroad’ programme (foreign minor) can contain no more than one 5 ECs language course in the language of the foreign university, and for students of the specialization Economics no more than 5 ECs in noneconomic and non-business courses, resp. for students of the specialization IE&B no more than 15 ECs in non-economic and non-business courses. The courses of the foreign minor should be post-propaedeutic and must not have a substantial overlap with other courses taken in the E&BE programme. Additionally, students must have completed the first year (propaedeuse) before enrolment at the partner university can take place. It is strongly recommended to complete most of the second year before leaving. See also the FEB infonet.

38


Entry requirements for the Bachelor’s Thesis

Definitive admission to the postpropaedeutic phase and the Bachelor’s programme has been approved and

Approval of the Bachelor’s programme Master’s information days Follow-on Master’s degree programmes



120 ECs from the approved courses (including propaedeutic courses and exemptions) have been earned. N.B. This regulation applies to all students registered for the degree programme. Apply via Progress, no later than 6 weeks before starting the Bachelor’s thesis. See the information on the FEB-infonet. November and April/May MSc in Finance MSc in Economics MSc in International Economics & Business MSc in Business Administration MSc in Human Resource Management MSc in International Business & Management MSc in International Financial Management MSc in Marketing MSc in Supply Chain Management MSc in Technology and Operations Management MSc in Teaching Economics and Business Studies (in Dutch) For admission to other Master’s programmes: submit an application to the Admissions Board. Bachelor’s degree in E&BE, (for MSc Economics preferably with specialization Economics), (for MSC IE&B preferably with specialization IE&B), and (for the English taught Master’s programmes:) sufficient command of English. 1 September and 1 February.

39


A.6.

BSc Fiscale Economie

A.6.1.


Opleidingsdirecteur: dr. P.P.M. Smid, 050-363 3668, [email protected] Opleidingscoördinator: mw. mr. M.C. Christen-Schiere, 050-363 3763, [email protected] Studieadvies: Study Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/bachelorstudent Taal: Nederlands Van de bacheloropleiding Fiscale Economie wordt in 2013-2014 alleen het derde jaar aangeboden, voor het laatst. Instromen als nieuwe student in de bacheloropleiding is dus niet meer mogelijk. Het eerste jaar van de bacheloropleiding Fiscale Economie is in het studiejaar 2011-2012 voor het laatst aangeboden. Voor de inhoud van de propedeuse wordt verwezen naar de studiegids 2011-2012. Het tweede studiejaar is in 2012-2013 voor het laatst verzorgd. Voor de inhoud van dat tweede jaar wordt verwezen naar de studiegids 2012-2013. Doel/inhoud Fiscaal economen houden zich bezig met de invloed van belastingheffing op het handelen van natuurlijke personen en rechtspersonen, zowel vanuit het perspectief van die personen als vanuit dat van de overheid. De bacheloropleiding Fiscale Economie (BSc FE) richt zich daarom op het doen verwerven van gedegen wetenschappelijke kennis, niet alleen op het gebied van de belastingheffing, maar ook op dat van de algemene economie (met nadruk op de welvaartstheoretische aspecten en de openbare financiën) en bedrijfseconomie (met nadruk op fiscaal comptabele verantwoording, accounting en financiering). Ter ondersteuning worden daarnaast wiskunde, statistiek, financiële rekenkunde, vermogensrecht, ondernemingsrecht, erfrecht en erfbelasting gegeven. Doel is studenten te leren hoe belastingheffing het gedrag van natuurlijke personen en organisaties beïnvloedt, alsmede op welke wijze een efficiënte en effectieve belastingwetgeving kan worden vormgegeven. Door globalisering en europeanisering wordt de belastingwetgeving in toenemende mate beïnvloed door internationale en Europese regelgeving. Hier wordt in de opleiding dan ook nadrukkelijk aandacht aan besteed. De bacheloropleiding Fiscale Economie is een beroepsgerichte opleiding en van de fiscaal econoom (afgestudeerde bachelor) wordt verwacht dat hij midden in de maatschappij staat en in staat is problemen op te lossen die liggen op het terrein van de fiscaliteit. Daarom wordt in de opleiding onder meer met casusposities gewerkt om de theorie te illustreren. Hierbij wordt ook ingegaan op actuele ontwikkelingen. Op deze wijze worden studenten getraind in het oplossen van praktijkproblemen van fiscale aard, waarbij ruim aandacht is voor de problematiek van organisaties, in de bachelorfase met name die in het midden- en kleinbedrijf (MKB). Voor het aankweken van een wetenschappelijke attitude is daarnaast volop aandacht voor wetsystematiek en wijze van rechtsvinding en methoden van economisch onderzoek.

40


In het derde jaar vindt verdere verdieping plaats van zowel bedrijfseconomische als algemeen economische vakken en komen ook fiscale vakken als Vennootschapsbelasting, Loonbelasting en Internationaal en Europees Belastingrecht aan de orde. Overigens worden de fiscale vakken gevolgd bij de Faculteit Rechtsgeleerdheid. Vanaf het begin van de opleiding is aandacht besteed aan het toepassen van (wetenschappelijke) kennis en inzicht. Naast hoorcolleges worden werkcolleges en practica gegeven, waarin studenten individueel en/of groepsgewijs casusposities uitwerken en presentaties verzorgen. Vanaf het begin van de opleiding hebben studenten papers geschreven en hebben ze elkaar feedback gegeven op schriftelijke en mondelinge presentaties. In het derde jaar van de opleiding volgen de studenten ook een onderdeel Business Research Methods dat een goede ondergrond vormt voor het zelfstandig kunnen doen van onderzoek. In de bachelorafstudeeropdracht moeten studenten een onderzoeksopdracht uitvoeren met een relatief eenvoudige probleemstelling, waarin zij hun verworven kennis en inzichten moeten inzetten. Aandacht wordt ook besteed aan het ontwikkelen van een academische attitude, waarbij de afgestudeerde voldoende kennis heeft van de algemene beginselen van behoorlijk bestuur, die door de belastingdienst moeten worden nageleefd. De fiscaal econoom zal bij het onderkennen van problemen en het oplossen daarvan gebruik moeten en kunnen maken van de nieuwste ontwikkelingen in het vakgebied, van maatschappelijke ontwikkelingen tot nieuwste wetenschappelijke inzichten en van wetswijziging tot jurisprudentie. Door steeds met actuele casusposities te werken en actuele ontwikkelingen bij bestaande casusposities te betrekken, wordt deze vaardigheid ontwikkeld en getraind. Carrièreperspectieven Met het oog op je carrièreperspectieven is het zeer aan te bevelen na afronding van je BSc-opleiding de aansluitende MSc Fiscale Economie te volgen. Aangezien er vrijwel geen bachelorstudenten rechtstreeks uitstromen naar het beroepenveld is er formeel niet zo veel bekend over de aansluiting tussen de opleiding en het beroepenveld. Wel is het zo dat veel studenten al tijdens hun bacheloropleiding bij belastingadvieskantoren, de belastingdienst of de belastingwinkel werkzaamheden verrichten. Hoewel dus verreweg de meeste afgestudeerde bachelors FE doorstromen naar de aansluitende masteropleiding, mag worden aangenomen dat met een bachelordiploma functies vervuld kunnen worden binnen dezelfde organisaties en instellingen waar master afgestudeerden terecht komen. Dit zijn bijvoorbeeld belastingadviesbureaus, accountantskantoren, de belastingdienst, het Ministerie van Financiën en fiscale afdelingen van ondernemingen. De verwachting is dat een afgestudeerde bachelor dan vooral op uitvoerend niveau werkzaamheden zal verrichten.

41


A.6.2.


V = Verplicht; K = Keuze; KG = Keuzegroep; EN = onderwijs wordt in het Engels gegeven; NL = onderwijs wordt in het Nederlands gegeven; zie ook de vakbeschrijvingen in Ocasys. Opleiding: Studiejaar: sem 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 NB

A.6.3.

BSc Fiscale Economie 3

vaknaam Omzet- en Overdrachtsbelasting vrije keuzeruimte 5 EC Openbare Financiën Staats- en Administratief recht Business Research Methods BE/FE/A&C Intro. to Internat. and European Tax Law Bachelorafstudeerwerkstuk FE Vennootschapsbelasting Fiscaal Comptabele Verantwoording 2 Loonbelasting

vakcode EC RGBFI00407 7 5 EBB856A05 5 EBB873A05 5 EBB018A05 5 RGBFI50203 3 EBB927B10 10 RGBFI00110 10 RGBFI00104 4 RGBFI00204 4

V/K V V V V V V V V V V

taal NL NL NL NL NL EN NL NL NL NL

Voor de vrije keuzeruimte kan gekozen worden uit post-propedeutische vakken van het verplichte deel van de curricula van de BSc BE, E&BE, EOR, inclusief de zogenoemde Keuzevakken BSc BE maar exclusief de cursus Financial Accounting II BE/A&C (EBB915A10)


Zie hoofdstuk F.1.13. A.6.4.

Regels en keuzes

Regels en keuzes BSc Fiscale Economie Toelatingseis post-propedeuse propedeuse Fiscale Economie Ingangseisen bachelorvakken



en

definitieve toelating tot de postpropedeuse het bachelorprogramma is goedgekeurd en 120 EC aan goedgekeurde vakken (inclusief propedeuse en vrijstellingen) is behaald. NB Deze regeling is van toepassing op alle studenten die staan ingeschreven voor de opleiding.

42




Aanvragen via Progress, uiterlijk 6 weken vóór de start van het bachelorafstudeerwerkstuk. Zie ook de informatie op FEB-infonet. November en april/ mei.

Toelatingseis doorstroommasters

MSc Fiscale Economie MSc Lerarenopleiding Economie & Bedrijfswetenschappen Voor toelating tot andere masters: verzoek naar de toelatingscommissie. BSc Fiscale Economie

Instroommoment doorstroommasters

1 september (later mogelijk, maar niet goed studeerbaar i.v.m. opbouw studieprogramma).

43


A.7.

BSc International Business

A.7.1.


Programme Director: Dr. B. Los, [email protected], 050-363 7317 Programme Coordinator: H.A. Ritsema LLM, [email protected], 050-363 3844 Information: Mrs R. van Est, [email protected], 050-363 6692 Secretary: Mrs S. Luijken, [email protected], 050-363 3458 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/bachelorstudent Language: English Objectives and content The BSc International Business is an interdisciplinary academic programme with a focus on practical issues. It aims to provide a solid academic grounding in the functioning of and interventions in organizations that operate in various countries and cultures. You learn to combine general business management within the international context of the organizations. You gain knowledge and understanding of general business and management, the main areas of international business and management and research methodology. You learn to apply an interdisciplinary and integral approach in defining, analyzing and solving problems in multinational organizations. In addition, you learn how to conduct research that complies with scientific standards in management and academia. Instruction in the language and social communication skills that are necessary for operating in an international and intercultural context is also given. Upon completion of the programme, you can opt for an academic career by continuing with a Master's programme or take up a position in (multinational) corporations or (international) governmental organizations. First and Second year The programme provides an introduction into elementary theories and concepts that are relevant in the field. In general, seven areas in which you need basic knowledge and skills are distinguished. These are: Organization Theory: an introduction to theories and concepts of organization structures and processes. You learn to consider organizational design and organizational change both in local companies as well as in multinational companies. You are introduced to scientific theories about these issues and are trained to apply concepts to practical situations. International Management and Economics: multinational companies have to constantly consider existing business opportunities and related strategic choices. You are introduced to the basics of (International) Economics in such a manner that you understand the relevant economic concepts of the international environment. Additionally, by studying relevant concepts within the area of Strategic Management, you will learn how companies are able to operate in this context.

44


International Finance and Accounting: you study the financial aspects of organizing and related aspects of Accounting and Control, with special attention to the extra complexity of these issues within multinational enterprises. International Business Law: in their international endeavours, companies often run into complicated legal problems on different levels. Basic knowledge of such issues is essential. Research Methodology and Statistics: you learn to conduct research that complies with scientific rules both in management and in academia. Courses in this cluster teach you how to think systematically and draw scientifically sound conclusions on the issues that you have studied. This is a must if you have ambitions in management and consultancy as well as in academia. Language and Intercultural Communication Skills: language and communication skills are very important for people who intend to operate in the international arena. In the first year an English language course improves your written, oral communication and presentation skills. During the study abroad in the third year you can choose a second (and third) foreign language. Ethics: you learn numerous ways to actively engage with ethical issues and dilemmas. Additionally, there is a set of courses dealing with more functional areas such as International Marketing and Information Technology. Preparing your studies abroad in the first and second year During your second Bachelor year, you need to prepare for your study abroad in the third year. To enrol at a foreign university, you must have completed your first year. Please, read the relevant parts in this Student Handbook about the Rules & Regulations on Study Abroad, carefully. In the first year a workshop is organized to give information about the study abroad programme. Third year Bachelor students studying International Business spend one semester of the third year of their programme abroad. The programme in the third year during the ‘home’ semester consists of the following core courses: Managing International Business Organizations Game, International Financial Management, Empirical Research Paper and International Strategic Management. Additionally, you write your Bachelor’s thesis in this semester. As indicated above, to be eligible to apply for one of the Faculty’s exchange programmes, you must have completed the first year. It is strongly recommended that (most of) the second year has also been completed by the time you leave in order to be able to take courses at the required level during your study abroad. Please note that, if you want to study at a university that does not offer courses in English, the preparation to attain the required language skills (e.g. French, German or Spanish) will exceed the credits of the mandatory courses of the first and/or second year. Please refer to FEB-infonet for further details. If you have participated in higher education outside the Netherlands before starting your studies in IB, you can apply for an exemption from the ‘study abroad’ period at the Education Desk. If granted, you must contact the programme director for IB, for a substitute programme.

45


Double degree programmes The BSc International Business offers the following Double Degree programmes: with the Universitas Indonesia in Jakarta, Indonesia; and with the Universitas Gadjah Mada in Yogyakarta, Indonesia. These double degree programmes are only offered to students who start in Indonesia and complete their Bachelor studies at Groningen. Career prospects When you are successful in your Bachelor programme you have all the tools you need to continue in a Master’s degree programme or to develop in a wide range of business management careers in international, multinational or transnational companies. Many companies and organizations offer traineeships and junior positions which introduce graduates to the different types of activities. The specific direction chosen varies according to interests and includes positions with an obvious international dimension such as Export Manager, International Marketer, or International Sales Manager. Furthermore, positions such as Product Manager, Treasury Manager, Human Resource Manager and Management Development Officer are important options. The programme also provides the skills, knowledge and expertise appropriate to a management career in a non-profit organization setting, such as the health care industry, the cultural and entertainment sector or non-governmental organizations. Finally, you could consider continuing your career within the academic field, given your rigorous training in the latest developments in this area. A.7.2.

Degree programme

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: sem 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2

46

BSc International Business/IB 1

course title English for IB Introduction to International Business Global Supply Chain Management Organizational Structure Financial Accounting for IB Organizational Behaviour for IB Economics for IB International Marketing for IB Statistics I for IB International Business Environment

code EBP665C05 EBP003A05 EBP018A05 EBP670C05 EBP030A05 EBP654D05 EBP660C05 EBP661C05 EBP657C05 EBP031A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5




2.2 2.2

Management Accounting for IB Research Methodology for IB

Programme: Year: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2

sem 1.1-2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 NB

·

A.7.3.

C C

EN EN

code EBB631B05 EBB037A05 EBB632A05 EBB036A05 EBB038B05 EBB682B05 EBB686A05 EBB034A05 EBB633B05 EBB608B05 EBB039B05 EBB635B05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5



code

EC 30 10 5 5 5 5

C/E C C C C C C



course title study abroad (= foreign minor) Bachelor’s Thesis IB Empirical Research Project for IB International Strategic Management International Financial Management Managing Intern. Bus. Organizations Game

·

5 5


course title Finance and Risk Management for IB Foreign Dir. Investment, Trade & Geogr. Information Systems Management CrossCultural Management Global Business History Statistics II for IB Comparative Country Studies Innovation Management in Multinationals Qualitative Research Methods for IB Ethics and International Business Global Political Economy International Business Law

Programme: Year:

EBP017B05 EBP662C05

EBB737B10 EBB044A05 EBB628A05 EBB627A05 EBB638B05

The courses of semester II can also be taken in semester I, the study abroad can also be taken in semester II. The study abroad programme (foreign minor) can contain a maximum of 15 ECs in non-economic and non-business courses, including 10 ECs of language courses.


See Section F.1.14.

47


A.7.4.

Rules and choices

Rules and choices BSc in International Business First-year information day February Entry requirements for the postPropaedeutic certificate in International propaedeutic phase Business. Provisional entry requirements for Students must have passed the BSA threshold, the post-propaedeutic phase, during i.e. earned 45 ECs or more during the first year the second year of registration of registration in the propaedeutic phase. For more information about the Binding Study Advice (BSA): section 9.3 ff of the BSc OER and/or section 2.4.2 of the General Information part of this student handbook. Entry requirements for the postIt is also possible to be admitted to the postpropaedeutic phase for students propaedeutic phase with a propaedeutic with a propaedeutic certificate from certificate in another degree programme A&C BE Business Administration E&BE Economics of Taxation Technology Management once additional requirements have been met. See section 5.7 of the BSc OER. NB Students who want to transfer to the postpropaedeutic phase of IB are advised to stay registered in the degree programme they obtained their propaedeutic diploma, until they have satisfied the additional requirements. Those wishing to transfer sooner to IB must register as a propaedeutic student with IB and as such they will come under the fixed quota regulation for IB. In case of doubt or questions, please contact the admissions office ([email protected]).

48


Entry requirements for Bachelor’s courses

Entry requirements for the Bachelor’s Thesis

Approval of the Bachelor’s programme Master’s information days

See the course descriptions in Ocasys. The ‘study abroad’ programme (foreign minor) can contain a maximum of 15 ECs in noneconomic and non-business courses, including 10 ECs of language courses. Additionally, students must have completed the first year (propedeuse) before enrolment at the partner university can take place. It is strongly recommended to complete most of the second year before leaving. See also the FEB infonet. Definitive admission to the postpropaedeutic phase and the Bachelor’s programme has been approved and 120 ECs from the approved courses (including propaedeutic courses and exemptions) have been earned. For students who take part in de double degree programme with Universitas Gadjah Mada or Universitas Indonesia the entry requirements are: the Bachelor’s programme has been approved and 40 ECs from the compulsory courses in Groningen (including exemptions) have been earned. Apply via Progress, no later than 6 weeks before starting the Bachelor’s thesis. See the information on the FEB-infonet. November and April/May

49


Follow-on Master’s degree programmes



50

MSc in International Business & Management MSc in Business Administration MSc in Finance (with completed SC Finance!) MSc in Human Resource Management MSc in International Economics and Business MSc in International Financial Management MSc in Marketing, MSc in Supply Chain Management MSc in Technology and Operations Management MSc in Teaching Economics and Business Studies (in Dutch) For admission to other Master’s programmes: submit an application to the Admissions Board. Bachelor’s degree in International Business and (for the English-taught Master’s programmes): sufficient command of English. 1 September and 1 February.


A.8.

BSc Technologiemanagement

A.8.1.


Opleidingsdirecteur: dr. J. Riezebos, 050-363 4853, [email protected] Opleidingscoördinator: mw. dr. G.C. Ruël, 050-363 7314, [email protected] Secretariaat: mw. N. van de Beek, 050-363 3921, [email protected] Studieadvies: Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/bachelorstudent Taal: Nederlands Van de bacheloropleiding Technologiemanagement wordt in 2013-2014 alleen het derde jaar aangeboden, voor het laatst. Instromen als nieuwe student in de bacheloropleiding is dus niet meer mogelijk. Het eerste jaar van de bacheloropleiding Technologiemanagement is in het studiejaar 20112012 voor het laatst aangeboden. Voor de inhoud van de propedeuse wordt verwezen naar de studiegids 2011-2012. Het tweede studiejaar is in 2012-2013 voor het laatst verzorgd. Voor de inhoud van dat tweede jaar wordt verwezen naar de studiegids 2012-2013. Doel/inhoud Organisaties moeten om te kunnen concurreren voortdurend hun bedrijfsprocessen herontwerpen vanwege technologische innovaties, marktomstandigheden, internationale ontwikkelingen en sociale factoren. Er is een groeiende behoefte aan hoog opgeleide personen, die kennis met betrekking tot het leiden en inrichten van organisaties paren aan goed inzicht in moderne technologische processen. De typische bedrijfskundige en bedrijfseconomische functies op het gebied van inkoop, verkoop, marketing, financiering, accounting, organisatie en logistiek raken hoe langer hoe meer verstrengeld met technische functies. Technologiemanagement combineert een gedegen inzicht in de bedrijfswetenschappen met een verdieping in een technisch profiel. Daardoor ontstaat een goede basis voor het verrichten van onderzoek naar het functioneren en verbeteren van processen in organisaties. Afgestudeerden van de opleiding Technologiemanagement kunnen complexe bedrijfsproblemen waar techniek een belangrijke rol speelt modelleren, analyseren, oplossingen aandragen en deze ook realiseren. Het kunnen werken in teamverband is daarbij van groot belang. Zowel de onderwijsfilosofie als de doelstellingen van de opleiding zijn gericht op wetenschappelijkheid, interdisciplinariteit, ontwerpen praktijkgerichtheid. Het doel van de opleiding is een wetenschappelijk geschoold bedrijfskundige met een goed technisch inzicht op te leiden. De opleiding bestaat in de bachelorfase uit bedrijfswetenschappelijke en technische vakken, aangevuld met onderzoeksmethodologie, wiskunde en informatica. Er kan na de propedeuse uit drie technische profielen worden gekozen: procestechnologie (richt zich op de procesindustrie); discrete technologie (richt zich op het maken van discrete producten); informatietechnologie (richt zich op ontwikkeling en beheer van IT-systemen).

51


De opleiding richt zich met de keuze van vakken op het raakvlak van management en techniek. De toepassingen van de technologie hebben betrekking op het ontwerpen en besturen van het primaire proces: productontwikkeling, voortbrenging en marketing. Voor de opleiding is het dan ook noodzakelijk dat technische, organisatiekundige, economische, sociale en juridische aspecten hand in hand gaan. De opleiding legt de nadruk op de integratie van vakgebieden. Het primaire proces vormt daarbij steeds het vertrekpunt in de opbouw van het curriculum. In de opleiding krijgt ontwerpmethodologie veel aandacht. Afgestudeerden Technologiemanagement onderscheiden zich van de 'klassieke' ingenieurs door kennis van en aandacht voor de relatie tussen technologie en organisatie. Technologie is voor hen altijd 'georganiseerde' technologie. Met andere woorden het ontwerp dient te resulteren in praktische implementeerbare systemen, waar organisatie en technologie/technieken adequaat zijn ingebed. Dit brengt onder andere met zich mee, dat tijdens de studie veel aandacht geschonken wordt aan het ontwikkelen van vaardigheden door middel van trainingen, practica, opdrachten en een afsluitend groepsonderzoek in een bedrijf en een individuele afstudeerscriptie. Carrièreperspectieven Met het oog op je carrièreperspectieven is het zeer aan te bevelen na afronding van je BSc-opleiding een aansluitende MSc-opleiding te volgen. Het soort bedrijf of organisatie waar je terecht kunt komen en de functie die je daar kunt bekleden, is afhankelijk van de gevolgde MSc-opleiding. Met je technische deskundigheid en je bedrijfskundige inzichten, kun je met technologiemanagement kiezen voor beroepen op het snijvlak van management en techniek. Productmanager en procestechnoloog zijn functies waarvoor vaak technologiemanagers gevraagd worden. Sommige van onze studenten komen ook terecht in de dienstensector of bij de overheid. Beroepen waar je als technologiemanager terecht kunt komen zijn bijvoorbeeld analist, consultant, brand manager, industrial engineer, informatieanalist, organisatieadviseur, productiemanager en kwaliteitsmanager. Feit is dat vrijwel alle afgestudeerden direct na hun afstuderen een baan vinden. Een afgestudeerde technologiemanager voelt zich thuis in organisaties die inzetten op innovatie. Die niet alleen kijken naar bestaande oplossingen, maar juist kijken naar nieuwe mogelijkheden door technieken te integreren. Tijdens de studie ontwikkel je de vaardigheden en talenten die daarvoor nodig zijn. Kritische vragen durven stellen, niet tevreden zijn met het eerste antwoord en altijd kijken of het beter kan. Een technologiemanager kan eigenlijk overal terecht , zolang er maar een focus is op techniek en een continue drang naar verbetering. Heel veel bedrijven hebben behoefte aan een technologiemanager. Dit varieert van de voedselindustrie, textielindustrie, metaalindustrie tot de computerindustrie. Overal zijn technologiemanagers gewild. Enkele organisaties waar je terecht zou

52


kunnen komen: FrieslandCampina, Scania, Heineken, Bolletje, John Deere, KLM, Oracle, Achmea, KPMG en natuurlijk ook de Rijksuniversiteit Groningen. A.8.2.


V = Verplicht; K = Keuze; KG = Keuzegroep; EN = onderwijs wordt in het Engels gegeven; NL = onderwijs wordt in het Nederlands gegeven; zie ook de vakbeschrijvingen in Ocasys. Opleiding: Studiejaar: Profiel: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 2.2

vaknaam Bedrijfsrecht Materiaalkunde en ontwerpen Productieplanning en -beheersing Applied manufacturing management Information Management TM Organisatie, technologie en verandering Bachelor’s Thesis TM Business & Supply Chain Marketing Ontwerpen en construeren voor TBK/TM Management of Product Innovation

Opleiding: Studiejaar: Profiel: sem 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 2.2

BSc Technologiemanagement/TM 3 Discrete Technologie vakcode EBB607A05 NAMATK-09 EBB651A05 TBAMM05E EBB620A05 EBB647B05 EBB643B15 EBB609A05 TBOC05E EBB652B05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 15 5 5 5


taal NL NL NL NL EN NL NL EN NL EN

V/K V V V V V V V V V

taal NL NL NL NL NL NL EN NL EN

BSc Technologiemanagement/TM 3 Informatietechnologie

vaknaam keuzevakken BSc TM (zie lijst) Bedrijfsrecht Productieplanning en -beheersing Architectuur en infrastructuur Organisatie, technologie en verandering Bachelor’s Thesis TM Business & Supply Chain Marketing Business Intelligence (bachelor) Management of Product Innovation

vakcode EBB607A05 EBB651A05 EBB665A05 EBB647B05 EBB643B15 EBB609A05 EBB032A05 EBB652B05

EC 10 5 5 5 5 15 5 5 5

53


Opleiding: Studiejaar: Profiel: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 2.2

vaknaam Bedrijfsrecht General process equipment Productieplanning en -beheersing Information Management TM keuzevak BSc TM (zie lijst) Organisatie, technologie en verandering Bachelor’s Thesis TM Business & Supply Chain Marketing keuzevak BSc TM (zie lijst) Management of Product Innovation

Opleiding: Studiejaar: Profiel: sem 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2

54

BSc Technologiemanagement/TM 3 Procestechnologie vakcode EBB607A05 CHTGPE05E EBB651A05 EBB620A05 EBB647B05 EBB643B15 EBB609A05 EBB652B05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 15 5 5 5


taal NL NL NL EN NL NL NL EN NL EN

V/K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K

taal EN NL EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN NL NL EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN

BSc Technologiemanagement/TM 3 keuzevakken BSc TM

vaknaam English Course for Business Admin. Informaticarecht voor niet-juristen Spec. Course Business & ICT Spec. Course Finance Spec. Course Marketing Spec. Course OMC: Management Acc. Spec. Course Operations & Supply Chains Spec. Course Small Bus.&Entrepreneurship Spec. Course Strategy & Innovation Man. Foreign Dir. Investment, Trade & Geogr. Healthcare Management Managementvaardigheden Ontwikkeling competenties Project Management Purchasing Management E-Business Knowledge Management Sports Economics Spec. Course Business & ICT Spec. Course Finance Spec. Course Marketing Spec. Course OMC: Management Acc. Spec. Course Operations & Supply Chains

vakcode EBB614B05 RGARI70110 EBB661A10 EBB881A10 EBB937A10 EBB884A10 EBB660A10 EBB887A10 EBB658B10 EBB037A05 EBB732A05 EBB697A05 EBB896A05 EBB667A05 EBB742A05 EBB666A05 EBB724B05 EBB920A05 EBB661A10 EBB881A10 EBB937A10 EBB884A10 EBB660A10

EC 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 10


2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 2.2

Spec. Course Small Bus.&Entrepreneurship Spec. Course Strategy & Innovation Man. Knowledge Management & Innovation Quality Management Ethics and International Business

A.8.3.


EBB887A10 EBB658B10 EBB723B05 EBB669A05 EBB608B05

10 10 5 5 5

K K K K K

EN EN EN EN EN

Zie hoofdstuk F.1.15, F.1.16 en F.1.17. A.8.4.

Regels en keuzes

Regels en keuzes BSc Technologiemanagement Toelatingseis post-propedeuse propedeuse Technologiemanagement Ingangseisen bachelorvakken


Ingangseisen Bachelor’s Thesis

definitieve toelating tot de postpropedeuse en het bachelorprogramma is goedgekeurd en 120 EC aan goedgekeurde vakken (inclusief propedeuse en vrijstellingen) is behaald.



NB Deze regeling is van toepassing op alle studenten die staan ingeschreven voor de opleiding. Aanvragen via Progress, uiterlijk 6 weken vóór de start van het bachelorafstudeerwerkstuk. Zie ook de informatie op FEB-infonet. November en april/mei MSc Technology and Operations Management MSc Business Administration MSc Finance (met afgeronde SC Finance) MSc Human Resource Management MSc International Business & Management MSc International Economics & Business MSc International Financial Management MSc Marketing MSc Supply Chain Management MSc Lerarenopleiding Economie & Bedrijfswetenschappen. Voor toelating tot andere masters: verzoek naar de toelatingscommissie.

55


Toelatingseisen doorstroommasters

Instroommoment(en) doorstroommasters

56

BSc Technologiemanagement en (voor de Engelstalige masteropleidingen): voldoende kennis van het Engels. 1 september en 1 februari


A.9.

Verbreding binnen de bacheloropleiding / Additional options within the Bachelor’s degree

A.9.1.

Minoren

Bij een groot aantal studierichtingen binnen de RUG dient naast de hoofdstudie ook een minor gevolgd te worden. Bij FEB bestaat die verplichting voor studenten die in september 2008 of later met de studie zijn begonnen. Voor studenten die eerder met hun opleiding zijn begonnen geldt een overgangsregeling. Een minor omvat 30 EC en wordt in principe in het eerste semester van het derde jaar gevolgd. Binnen de RUG worden drie soorten minoren onderscheiden: universitaire minor. Een universitaire minor is een minor die buiten het vakgebied van de bedrijfskunde en de economie ligt en door een andere faculteit van de RUG wordt aangeboden. Doel van de universitaire minor is studenten in staat te stellen hun blikveld te verbreden door over de grenzen van het eigen vakgebied heen te kijken. Het aanbod aan universtaire minoren wordt elk voorjaar bekend gemaakt en is te vinden op de RUG-website. Minoren aangeboden door de Faculteit Economie en Bedrijfskunde kunnen niet worden opgevoerd als universitaire minor. facultaire minor. Uitgangspunt van de facultaire minor is dat studenten zich verder moeten kunnen verdiepen in één of meerdere deelgebieden van het bedrijfskundig-economisch vakgebied. Een facultaire minor heeft dus het karakter van een specialisatie. Een overzicht van de vakken die in het kader van een facultaire minor gevolgd mogen worden is te vinden bij het programmaoverzicht van de eigen opleiding. buitenlandminor. Naast een universitaire of facultaire minor kunnen studenten ook opteren voor een buitenlandminor. Dit betekent dat studenten in het eerste semester van het derde jaar voor 30 EC aan vakken aan een buitenlandse universiteit kunnen volgen. Een buitenlandminor is bedoeld voor studenten die tijdens hun studie ervaringen willen opdoen met wonen en studeren in het buitenland. De Faculteit Economie en Bedrijfskunde heeft daartoe een groot aantal samenwerkingscontracten afgesloten met universiteiten in het buitenland. De verplichting een minor te volgen geldt niet voor alle opleidingen van FEB. Per opleiding met een minor zijn de regels als volgt: Studenten van de bacheloropleidingen Bedrijfskunde en Bedrijfseconomie kunnen kiezen uit alle drie de soorten minoren. Het is niet toegestaan delen van verschillende minoren met elkaar te combineren. Studenten van de bacheloropleiding E&BE-profiel Economics hebben de keuze uit een facultaire minor of een buitenlandminor. Studenten van de opleidingen International Business en E&BE - profiel IE&B zijn verplicht een buitenlandminor te volgen. Studenten van de bacheloropleidingen A&C, EOR, FE, en TM hoeven geen minor te volgen. Wel mogen EOR-studenten één semester van hun opleiding vervangen door studie in het buitenland, waarbij het vakkenpakket goedgekeurd moet zijn door de opleidingsdirecteur.

57


Meer informatie over minoren, de toelatingseisen en spelregels is o.a. te vinden op de RUG-website. Voor informatie over alles wat de buitenlandminor betreft kun je terecht op het FEB-Infonet. Verder hebben de opleidingen Bedrijfskunde en Bedrijfseconomie een uitgebreide minorhandleiding samengesteld, die te vinden is op de Nestorsite van de BSc Bedrijfskunde c.q. de BSc Bedrijfseconomie. A.9.2.

Bachelor Honoursprogramma

De universiteit kent het Honours College, dat een aanvullend bachelorprogramma aanbiedt voor gemotiveerde en geïnteresseerde studenten die een extra uitdaging in hun studie willen. Als je het Bachelor Honoursprogramma met succes voltooit, krijg je een honours-certificaat. Zo kun je gemakkelijker toelating krijgen tot bepaalde masteropleidingen. Bovendien geldt het als een sterk punt op je CV. Binnen het programma werk je in kleine groepen en word je intensief begeleid door enthousiaste docenten. Het Bachelor Honoursprogramma van FEB is Engelstalig. Als je vanuit FEB tot het Bachelor Honoursprogramma wordt toegelaten volg je de gewone vakken van de bachelor van jouw keuze. Daarnaast volg je speciale honours workshops en vakken waarbij zowel onderzoek als praktijk op het gebied van economie en/of bedrijfskunde uitgebreid aan bod komen. Ook organiseer je samen met medestudenten gastcolleges, bedrijfsbezoeken en andere activiteiten. Tot slot volg je samen met honours studenten van andere faculteiten een aantal verbredende vakken die speciaal voor honours studenten zijn ontwikkeld. Het Honours Bachelor programma begint in het tweede semester van het eerste jaar en je volgt het in combinatie met je reguliere bachelorprogramma. Voor toelating geldt een selectieprocedure. Kijk voor meer informatie op de RUG-website. A.9.3.

Introductie Lerarenopleiding

Het communicatieve aspect wint aan belang in de beroepsuitvoering van economen en bedrijfskundigen: samenwerken, presenteren, scholing, overtuigen, uitleggen, instrueren zijn belangrijke competenties voor een econoom of bedrijfskundige. Het is belangrijk om te weten wat je eigen competenties zijn en hoe je deze verder kunt ontwikkelen. In het bachelorprogramma kun je deelnemen aan de cursus 'Introductie Lerarenopleiding (al dan niet als extra vak) waarin al deze facetten diepgaand en op maat behandeld worden. Je gaat aan de slag met je eigen leerwensen. Het is een cursus van 5 EC, die in semester 1.2 wordt aangeboden. Meer informatie over de cursus Introductie Lerarenopleiding kun je vinden op internet. Je kunt ook contact opnemen met Nanda Stijntjes of Louwrens Wouda (tel.: 050-363 3738, e-mail: [email protected] of [email protected]). A.9.4.

Minors

A large number of degree programmes at the University of Groningen comprise both a Major and a Minor. This applies to students who started a FEB degree programme in September 2008 or later. There are transitional regulations for students who started their studies earlier. A Minor comprises 30 ECs, and is in principle taken in the first semester of the third year.

58


The University offers three types of Minors: University Minor. A University Minor is one offered outside the field of Economics and Business, and is offered by a different Faculty of the University of Groningen. The aim of a University Minor is to enable students to broaden their expertise by venturing beyond the borders of their own field. The range of University Minors will be announced each spring, and can be found on the University website. Minors offered by the Faculty of Economics and Business may not be chosen as a University Minor. Faculty Minor. The idea behind a Faculty Minor is that students can deepen their knowledge of one or more of the subfields of business and economics. A Faculty Minor is thus a specialization. An overview of the Faculty Minors that can be taken can be found in the list of courses in your own degree programme. Foreign Minor. In addition to University or Faculty Minors, students can opt for a Foreign Minor. This means that students in the first semester of the third year can take courses with a study load of 30 ECs at a foreign university. A Foreign Minor is intended for students who want to gain international experience by studying abroad. To facilitate the Foreign Minor, the Faculty of Economics and Business has signed a large number of cooperation agreements with universities abroad. The obligation to take a Minor does not apply to all FEB degree programmes. The regulations for each degree programme with a Minor are as follows: Students of the Bachelor’s degree programmes in Business Administration and Business Economics may choose any of the three types of Minor, subject to the proviso under University Minor. It is not possible to combine parts of different Minors with each other. Students of the Bachelor’s degree programme in E&BE Economics profile may choose either a Faculty Minor or a Foreign Minor. Students of the Bachelor’s degree programmes International Business and E&BE – IE&B profile must follow a Foreign Minor. Students of the Bachelor’s degree programmes in A&C, EOR, FE and TM do not have to take a Minor at all. However, EOR students may spend one semester of their degree programme abroad on condition that the cluster of subjects has been approved by the programme directeor. More information about Minors, admission requirements and rules can be found on the University website. For more information about a Foreign Minor, please go to the FEB infonet. In addition, the degree programmes in Business Administration and Business Economics have compiled an extensive Minor Manual, which can be found on the Nestor site of the BSc in Business Administration or the BSc in Business Economics respectively. A.9.5.

Bachelor’s Honours programme

The University has an Honours College, which offers additional courses alongside the Bachelor programme for a selected group of students who are looking for extra challenges in their studies. Completing the Bachelor’s Honours programme

59


successfully results in a separate honours degree certificate. This improves your chances to be admitted to Master’s programmes; and of course, it is also an asset to your CV. The programme is set up in small groups with intensive supervision by enthusiastic lecturers. The FEB Bachelor’s Honours programme is in English. When you are admitted to the Bachelor’s Honours programme as an FEB student, you follow the standard courses in the Bachelor of your choice. In addition, you attend special honours workshops and courses that deal extensively with both research and practice in the field of economics and/or business. Together with your fellow students, you will organize and participate in guest lectures, company visits and other activities. Finally, together with honours students from other Faculties, you will take a number of courses that have been developed especially for honours students. The Bachelor’s Honours programme starts in the second semester of the first year and is combined with your regular Bachelor’s programme. To be admitted, there is a selection procedure. For more information, visit the University website. .

60


B.


B.1.

Schakelprogramma’s Accountancy en Controlling

B.1.1.


Opleidingsdirecteur: dr. E.P. Jansen- 050-363 6382, [email protected] Opleidingscoördinator: mw. I.M. Luttmer-Noest, 050-363 3768, [email protected] Secretariaat: mw. E.H. van der Voort-Toisuta, 050-363 3768, [email protected] Studieadviseur: Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/studentsupport/premaster Taal: Nederlands Doel/inhoud De schakelprogramma’s Accountancy en Controlling geven toegang tot de reguliere masteropleiding Accountancy en Controlling. Het programma van 30 (voor studenten met een HBO-diploma Accountancy, inclusief Overall Toets) of 60 studiepunten (voor studenten met een HBO-BE-diploma of HBO-Accountancy zonder Overall Toets) is bedoeld om je kennis en vaardigheden bij te brengen op het niveau van de reguliere bacheloropleiding Accountancy en Controlling. Het programma richt zich op het verwerven van wetenschappelijke kennis, vaardigheden en inzicht op het gebied van de economie, bedrijfskunde, accountancy en controlling. De nadruk ligt daarbij op de betrouwbaarheid van informatie voor de besturing van organisaties en voor het afleggen van verantwoording over het gevoerde beleid aan de interne en externe stakeholders. Daarvoor is kennis vereist van en inzicht in de vakgebieden organisatie en management, financial accounting, management accounting, internal control en recht. Daarnaast is aandacht vereist voor wetenschappelijke methoden en technieken en academische en praktische vaardigheden. Het programma stimuleert een analytische en kritische benadering van meestal interdisciplinaire organisatieproblemen en ontwikkelt kennis en vaardigheden om tot implementeerbare oplossingen te komen. Carrièreperspectieven Het schakelprogramma Accountancy en Controlling biedt primair de basis voor een masteropleiding Accountancy en Controlling en de daarop aansluitende (theoretische) postinitiële opleidingen voor Registeraccountant (Executive Master of Accountancy) respectievelijk Registercontroller (Executive Master of Finance and Control), die worden aangeboden door de Faculteit Economie en Bedrijfskunde. Gelet op het brede bedrijfswetenschappelijke profiel, biedt het certificaat Accountancy en Controlling je ook diverse mogelijkheden voor functies in profit- en non profit-organisaties. Hierbij moet in eerste instantie worden gedacht aan uitvoerende en ondersteunende functies op financieel-administratief gebied, zoals (bedrijfs)administrateur, assistent-controller, financieel-administratief beleidsmedewerker e.d.

61


B.1.2.


V = Verplicht; K = Keuze; KG = Keuzegroep; EN = onderwijs wordt in het Engels gegeven; NL = onderwijs wordt in het Nederlands gegeven; zie ook de vakbeschrijvingen in Ocasys. Opleiding: Studiejaar: Profiel: sem 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.2

vaknaam Financial Accounting II BE/A&C Spec. Course OMC: Management Accounting Business Research Methods for Pre-MSc

Opleiding: Studiejaar: Profiel: sem 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 B.1.3.

Pre-Master programma’s (Nederlandstalig) 1 Pre-MSc A&C voor HBO-AC vakcode EBB915A10 EBB884A10

EC V/K taal 10 V NL 10 V EN

EBS001A10

10

V

EN

Pre-Master programma’s (Nederlandstalig) 1 Pre-MSc A&C voor HBO-BE

vaknaam Belastingrecht 2 Internal Control (BSc) Ondernemingsrecht A&C/FE Business Research Methods for Pre-MSc Financiële en Actuariële Rekenkunde Bachelorafstudeerwerkstuk A&C Spec. Course OMC for Pre-MSc A&C Theoretische inleid. Auditing & Control Advanced Financial Accounting Financiering A&C

vakcode RGMFI00406 EBB048A05 EBB901B05 EBS001A10 EBB822A04 EBB924A10 EBB076A05 EBB943A05 EBB045A05 EBB823C05

EC V/K taal 6 V NL 5 V NL 5 V NL 10 V EN 4 V NL 10 V NL 5 V EN 5 V NL 5 V NL 5 V NL

Regels en keuzes

Regels en keuzes HBO-schakelprogramma’s A&C Ingangseisen schakelprogramma’s voor Pre-MSc A&C voor HBO-AC (30 EC): diploma HBO-AC plus voldoende resultaat voor de Overall Toets (OAT) voor Pre-MSc A&C voor HBO-BE (60 EC): diploma HBO-Bedrijfseconomie of diploma HBO-AC zonder voldoende resultaat voor de Overall Toets (OAT)

62


Geldigheidsduur toelating tot schakelprogramma’s



Mastervoorlichting Doorstroommaster Toelatingseis doorstroommaster Instroommoment(en) doorstroommasters

voor Pre-MSc A&C voor HBO-AC (30 EC): 1 jaar; verlenging met maximaal 1 jaar is mogelijk als in het eerste jaar minimaal 20 EC van het programma is afgerond. voor Pre-MSc A&C voor HBO-BE (60 EC): 1 jaar; verlenging met maximaal 1 jaar is mogelijk als in het eerste jaar minimaal 50 EC van het programma is afgerond. Zie ook art. 8.6 van de BSc-OER. Pre-MSc A&C voor HBO-AC (30 EC): n.v.t Pre-MSc A&C voor HBO-BE (60 EC): o het schakelprogramma is goedgekeurd en o Business Research Methods for PreMSc (EBS001A10) is afgerond. Aanvragen via Progress, uiterlijk 6 weken vóór de start van het bachelorafstudeerwerkstuk. Zie ook de informatie op FEB-infonet. Na afronding van het schakelprogramma ontvangt men een certificaat van toelating tot de master A&C. April/mei, met informatie over de twee profielen. MSc Accountancy en Controlling afgerond schakelprogramma Accountancy & Controlling 1 september en 1 februari

63


B.2.

Schakelprogramma Technology and Operations Management

B.2.1.


Opleidingsdirecteur: mw. prof.dr. I.F.A. Vis, 050 363 7364, [email protected] Opleidingscoördinator: dr. J.A.C. Bokhorst, 050-363 4693, [email protected] Secretariaat: mw. N. van de Beek, 050-363 3921, [email protected] Studieadviseur: Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/premaster Taal: Nederlands Doel De bacheloropleiding Technologiemanagement (TM) laat afgestudeerden van HBOopleidingen toe tot een 1-jarig schakelprogramma waarmee men toegang krijgt tot de MSc Technology and Operations Management. Het Nederlandse schakelprogramma staat open voor alle studenten met een HBO- of academische bacheloropleiding met belangstelling voor Technology and Operations Management. Het is specifiek interessant voor de huidige HBO- opleiding Technische Bedrijfskunde of een aanverwante opleiding. Te denken valt aan: (Hogere) Technische Bedrijfskunde; International Technology Management; Bedrijfskunde Agribusiness (Van Hall Instituut); Vervoersacademie (Logistiek Management); Industrieel Management/Business Engineering; Werktuigbouw; Elektrotechniek; Autotechniek; Human Technology; Overige Operations/ Logistieke richtingen. Het Nederlandstalige programma omvat een aantal vakken dat ook in het reguliere bachelorprogramma van Technologiemanagement is opgenomen. Het Engelstalige programma is toegankelijk voor Engelstalige studenten met belangstelling voor Technology and Operations Management en biedt veel vakken aan die gedeeld worden met de andere Pre-MSc programma’s. Na het Nederlandse of Engelstalige schakelprogramma volgt de Engelstalige masteropleiding Technology and Operations Management. Binnen de master ligt het accent op planning en beheersing van processen gedurende de gehele levenscyclus van producten en diensten en op het introduceren en ontwerpen van technologische innovaties voor organisaties. Het programma van de masteropleiding staat verder beschreven in hoofdstuk D.16. Na afronding van je schakelprogramma krijg je een certificaat van toegang tot de masteropleiding Technology and Operations Management. Na afronding van deze masteropleiding mag je de titel Master of Science Technology and Operations Management voeren. Ook mag je na afronding van je schakelprogramma starten met de MSc Supply Chain Management.

64


Voor een afgestudeerde van deze opleiding behoort het innoveren van producten, processen en netwerken van organisaties tot de kern van zijn of haar competenties. Dat betekent niet alleen kijken naar bestaande oplossingen, maar juist kijken naar nieuwe mogelijkheden door technieken te integreren. Tijdens de studie ontwikkel je de vaardigheden en talenten die daarvoor nodig zijn. De uitdaging is om na te gaan of het beter kan en bewijs te verzamelen voor alternatieven die gevonden zijn. Carrièreperspectieven Met je technische deskundigheid en je bedrijfskundige inzichten, kun je met Technology and Operations Management kiezen voor beroepen op het snijvlak van management en techniek. Logistic manager, Operations manager, Project manager, Innovation manager, Product manager en Lean change manager zijn functies waar je terecht kunt met een MSc Technology and Operations Management. Sommige van onze studenten komen ook terecht in de dienstensector of bij de overheid. Feit is dat vrijwel alle afgestudeerden direct na hun afstuderen een baan vinden. B.2.2.


V = Verplicht; K = Keuze; KG = Keuzegroep; EN = onderwijs wordt in het Engels gegeven; NL = onderwijs wordt in het Nederlands gegeven; zie ook de vakbeschrijvingen in Ocasys. Opleiding: Studiejaar: Profiel:

sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 2.2 B.2.3.

Pre-Master programma’s (Nederlandstalig) 1 Pre-MSc Technology and Operations Management/TOM (Nederlandstalig)

vaknaam Mathematics for Pre-MSc Organization Theory & Design for Pre-MSc Productieplanning en -beheersing Business Research Methods for Pre-MSc Organisatie, technologie en verandering Bachelor’s Thesis TM Business & Supply Chain Marketing Work Organization and Job Design Management of Product Innovation

vakcode EBS002A05 EBS003A05 EBB651A05 EBS001A10 EBB647B05 EBB643B15 EBB609A05 EBB601B05 EBB652B05

EC V/K taal 5 V EN 5 V EN 5 V NL 10 V EN 5 V NL 15 V NL 5 V EN 5 V EN 5 V EN

Regels en keuzes

Regels en keuzes HBO-schakelprogramma TOM Nederlandstalig Ingangseisen schakelprogramma alle technische HBO-diploma’s alle bedrijfskundige HBO-diploma’s alle academische technische bachelordiploma’s.

65


Geldigheidsduur toelating tot schakelprogramma

Mastervoorlichting

1 jaar; verlenging met maximaal 1 jaar is mogelijk als in het eerste jaar minimaal 45 EC van het programma is afgerond. Zie ook art. 8.6 van de BSc-OER. het schakelprogramma is goedgekeurd en Mathematics for Pre-MSc (EBS002A05) en Business Research Methods for Pre-MSc (EBS001A10) zijn afgerond. Aanvragen via Progress, uiterlijk 6 weken vóór de start van de Bachelor’s Thesis. Zie ook de informatie op FEB-infonet. Na afronding van het schakelprogramma ontvangt men een certificaat van toelating tot de master Technology and Operations Management. November en april/mei.

Doorstroommaster


Ingangseisen Bachelor’s Thesis


Toelatingseisen doorstroommaster Instroommoment(en) doorstroommaster

66

afgerond schakelprogramma TOM en voldoende kennis van het Engels. 1 september en 1 februari


C.


C.1.1.

Introduction

Programme Director: Dr P. P. M. Smid, [email protected], 050-363 3668 Programme Coordinator: Dr C.A. Huijgen, [email protected], 050-363 7206 Admissions and study advisors: Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/premaster Language: English Aim/content The Master of Science programmes are one-year (60 ECs) degree programmes at the Faculty of Economics and Business (FEB) and taught in English. There are nine different MSc programmes for which we offer English-taught Pre-MSc programmes in 2013-2014: 1 Business Administration; 2 Finance; 3 Human Resource Management; 4 International Business and Management; 5 International Financial Management; 6 International Economics and Business; 7 Marketing; 8 Supply Chain Management; and 9 Technology and Operations Management. The MSc Business Administration is subdivided into 4 tracks: ‘Change Management’, ‘Organizational & Management Control’, ‘Small Business & Entrepeneurship’ and ‘Strategic Innovation Management’. The Pre-MSc programme is especially intended for students with a Bachelor’s degree of one of the NVAO accredited HBO programmes with a study load of 240 ECs. It prepares them for one of the above listed MSc programmes. The Pre-MSc programme is also open to students with an accredited academic Bachelor’s degree, who do not immediately qualify for one of these MSc programmes, either from the Netherlands or abroad. After passing the 1-year Pre-MSc programme, you will be issued with a ‘proof of admission’ granting you admission to the Master of Science that belongs to the chosen Pre-MSc programme. The Pre-MSc programme comprises a fixed, non Master-specific core of 25 ECs, 15 of which will be offered in the first semester. There are also 35 ECs available for Masterspecific courses – 15 in the first semester and 20 in the second. A ‘Research paper for Pre-MSc’ of 10 ECs, offered in the second semester, is part of the programme. To be allowed to participate in this course ‘Research paper for Pre-MSc’, you need to have passed ‘Mathematics for Pre-MSc’ and ‘Business Research Methods for Pre-MSc’.

67


If, at the end of the academic year, you have not completed the full programme, but have obtained at least 50 ECs, -you are not admitted to the MSc,- but you may continue in the Pre-MSc in the following year. After you have finished the remaining course(s) successfully, you will be admitted to the MSc. If you have obtained less than 50 ECs by the end of the academic year, you failed the Pre-MSc programme and cannot continue with this programme. If you still want to take the MSc (specialization), then you will have to register for the related FEB Bachelor’s degree. Failed Pre-MSc students may request exemptions on the basis of earlier training or experience from the Board of Examiners for the courses that they did pass during their Pre-MSc year. Programme structure The programme is as follows: Period Course 1.1 Mathematics for Pre-MSc Master-specific courses

EC 5 10

1.2

Business Research Methods for Pre-MSc

10

Master-specific courses

5

2.1-2

Research paper for Pre-MSc

10

2.1


10

2.2


10

In C2, C3, C4, C5, C6, C7, C8, C9, C10 you will find additional information about each Pre-MSc programme. If you have succesfully complied with all the requirements /courses of the Pre-MSc, you may enter the Master without restriction. Career prospects Graduates may acquire all sorts of staff positions and more general management positions after obtaining their Master's degree. Depending on the chosen programme, these include jobs in the field of general management, financial management, marketing management (e.g. product manager), production and logistics (e.g. purchasing manager), quality control (e.g. quality manager), human resource management, international business, international economics and organizational consultancy. C.2.

Pre-MSc Business Administration

The Pre-MSc Business Administration (BA) consists of four different tracks: Change Management, Organizational and Management Control (O&MC), Small Business and Entrepeneurship (SB&E) and Strategic Innovation Management (SIM):

68


C.2.1.

Pre-MSc BA - Change Management

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 C.2.2.

Pre-MSc Programmes (English) 1 Pre-MSc BA Change Management

course title Mathematics for Pre-MSc Organization Theory & Design for Pre-MSc Project Management Business Research Methods for Pre-MSc Organizational Change for Pre-MSc Research Paper for Pre-MSc BA CM Introduction to HRM Work Organization and Job Design Ethics and International Business Strategic Management B&M

code EBS002A05 EBS003A05 EBB667A05 EBS001A10 EBB634B05 EBS006A10 EBB740A05 EBB601B05 EBB608B05 EBB649C05

EC 5 5 5 10 5 10 5 5 5 5

C/E lang C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN

Pre-MSc BA - Organizational and Management Control

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2

Pre-MSc Programmes (English) 1 Pre-MSc BA Organizational & Management Control/O&MC

course title Spec. Course OMC: Management Acc. Mathematics for Pre-MSc Organization Theory & Design for Pre-MSc Business Research Methods for Pre-MSc Research Paper for Pre-MSc BA O&MC Introduction to HRM Quality Management Asset Pricing and Capital Budgeting Strategic Management B&M

code EBB884A10 EBS002A05 EBS003A05 EBS001A10 EBS009A10 EBB740A05 EBB669A05 EBP032A05 EBB649C05

EC 10 5 5 10 10 5 5 5 5

C/E lang C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN

69


C.2.3.

Pre-MSc BA - Small Business and Entrepeneurship

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1 2.2 C.2.4.

Pre-MSc Programmes (English) 1 Pre-MSc BA Small Business & Entrepreneurship/SB&E

course title Mathematics for Pre-MSc Organization Theory & Design for Pre-MSc Project Management Business Research Methods for Pre-MSc Organizational Change for Pre-MSc Research Paper for Pre-MSc BA SB&E Spec. Course Small Bus.&Entrepreneurship Introduction to HRM Strategic Management B&M

code EBS002A05 EBS003A05 EBB667A05 EBS001A10 EBB634B05 EBS012A10 EBB887A10 EBB740A05 EBB649C05

EC 5 5 5 10 5 10 10 5 5


Pre-MSc BA - Strategic Innovation Management

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1 2.2

70

Pre-MSc Programmes (English) 1 Pre-MSc BA Strategic Innovation Management/SIM

course title Mathematics for Pre-MSc Organization Theory & Design for Pre-MSc Project Management Business Research Methods for Pre-MSc Organizational Change for Pre-MSc Research Paper for Pre-MSc BA SIM Spec. Course Strategy & Innovation Man. Quality Management Strategic Management B&M

code EBS002A05 EBS003A05 EBB667A05 EBS001A10 EBB634B05 EBS011B10 EBB658B10 EBB669A05 EBB649C05

EC 5 5 5 10 5 10 10 5 5



C.3.

Pre-MSc Finance


C.4.

Pre-MSc Programmes (English) 1 Pre-MSc Finance

course title Financial Accounting for Pre-MSc Finance Mathematics for Pre-MSc Microeconomics for E&BE: Consumers&Firms Business Research Methods for Pre-MSc Macroeconomics for E&BE Research Paper for Pre-MSc Finance Spec. Course Finance Growth, Institutions and Business Ethics and International Business

code EBP040A05 EBS002A05 EBP819B05

EC 5 5 5

EBS001A10 EBP812B05 EBS007B10 EBB881A10 EBB022A05 EBB608B05

10 5 10 10 5 5

C/E lang C EN C EN C EN C C C C C C

EN EN EN EN EN EN

Pre-MSc Human Resource Management

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2

Pre-MSc Programmes (English) 1 Pre-MSc Human Resource Management/HRM

course title Mathematics for Pre-MSc Organization Theory & Design for Pre-MSc Project Management Business Research Methods for Pre-MSc Organizational Change for Pre-MSc Research Paper for Pre-MSc HRM Introduction to HRM Work Organization and Job Design Ethics and International Business Strategic Management B&M

code EBS002A05 EBS003A05 EBB667A05 EBS001A10 EBB634B05 EBS013A10 EBB740A05 EBB601B05 EBB608B05 EBB649C05

EC 5 5 5 10 5 10 5 5 5 5


71


C.5.

Pre-MSc International Business and Management


C.6.

Pre-MSc Programmes (English) 1 Pre-MSc International Business & Management/IB&M

course title Foreign Dir. Investment, Trade & Geogr. International Strategic Management Mathematics for Pre-MSc Business Research Methods for Pre-MSc International Financial Management Research Paper for Pre-MSc IB&M Empirical Research Project for IB Innovation Management in Multinationals Ethics and International Business Managing Intern. Bus. Organizations Game

code EBB037A05 EBB628A05 EBS002A05 EBS001A10 EBB627A05 EBS014A10 EBB044A05 EBB034A05 EBB608B05 EBB638B05

EC 5 5 5 10 5 10 5 5 5 5


Pre-MSc International Economics and Business


72

Pre-MSc Programmes (English) 1 Pre-MSc International Economics & Business/IE&B

course title Foreign Dir. Investment & Trade for E&BE Mathematics for Pre-MSc Microeconomics for E&BE: Consumers&Firms Business Research Methods for Pre-MSc International Business Strategy for IE&B Research Paper for Pre-MSc IE&B Spec. Course IE&B Econometrics for IE&B Philosophy and Ethics of Business

code EBB064A05 EBS002A05 EBP819B05

EC 5 5 5

EBS001A10 EBB023B05 EBS015A10 EBB029A10 EBB070A05 EBB069A05

10 5 10 10 5 5

C/E lang C EN C EN C EN C C C C C C

EN EN EN EN EN EN


C.7.

Pre-MSc International Financial Management


C.8.

Pre-MSc Programmes (English) 1 Pre-MSc International Financial Management/IFM

course title Finance and Risk Management for IB International Strategic Management Mathematics for Pre-MSc Business Research Methods for Pre-MSc Financial Accounting for E&BE Research Paper for Pre-MSc IFM Empirical Research Project for IB Innovation Management in Multinationals International Financial Management Managing Intern. Bus. Organizations Game

code EBB631B05 EBB628A05 EBS002A05 EBS001A10 EBP802B05 EBS017A10 EBB044A05 EBB034A05 EBB627A05 EBB638B05

EC 5 5 5 10 5 10 5 5 5 5


Pre-MSc Marketing

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1 2.2

Pre-MSc Programmes (English) 1 Pre-MSc Marketing

course title Spec. Course Marketing Mathematics for Pre-MSc Organization Theory & Design for Pre-MSc Business Research Methods for Pre-MSc Research Paper for Pre-MSc Marketing Spec. Course Strategy & Innovation Man. Introduction to HRM Strategic Management B&M

code EBB937A10 EBS002A05 EBS003A05 EBS001A10 EBS008B10 EBB658B10 EBB740A05 EBB649C05

EC 10 5 5 10 10 10 5 5

C/E lang C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN

73


C.9.

Pre-MSc Supply Chain Management


C.10.

Pre-MSc Programmes (English) 1 Pre-MSc Supply Chain Management/SCM

course title Mathematics for Pre-MSc Organization Theory & Design for Pre-MSc Purchasing Management Business Research Methods for Pre-MSc Operations and Logistics Management Research Paper for Pre-MSc SCM Spec. Course Operations & Supply Chains Business & Supply Chain Marketing Production Planning & Quality Control

code EBS002A05 EBS003A05 EBB742A05 EBS001A10 EBB068A05 EBS010C10 EBB660A10 EBB609A05 EBB058A05

EC 5 5 5 10 5 10 10 5 5


Pre-MSc Technology and Operations Management

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile:

sem 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2

74

Pre-MSc Programmes (English) 1 Pre-MSc Technology and Operations Management/TOM (Engelstalig)

course title Spec. Course Operations & Supply Chains Mathematics for Pre-MSc Organization Theory & Design for Pre-MSc Business Research Methods for Pre-MSc Research Paper for Pre-MSc TOM Business & Supply Chain Marketing Work Organization and Job Design Management of Product Innovation Production Planning & Quality Control

code EBB660A10 EBS002A05 EBS003A05 EBS001A10 EBS016B10 EBB609A05 EBB601B05 EBB652B05 EBB058A05

EC 10 5 5 10 10 5 5 5 5



C.11.

Rules and choices

Rules and choices Pre-MSc programmes Entry requirements for the Pre-MSc See the English-language website, or art. 8.6 of programmes the BSc OER. Validity of admission to the Pre-MSc Admission to the Pre-MSc programmes is programmes valid for one year and is only granted once. It will only be extended – for a maximum of one year – if at least 50 ECs from the Pre-MSc programme have been obtained. Entry requirements for the Research Students have passed Papers for: Mathematics for Pre-MSc (EBS002A05), Pre-MSc BA, and Pre-MSc Finance, Business Research Methods for Pre-MSc Pre-MSc HRM, (EBS001A10). Pre-MSc IB&M, and Pre-MSc IE&B the Pre-MSc programme has been Pre-MSc IFM, approved. Pre-MSc Marketing, Pre-MSc SCM, Pre-MSC TOM Approval of the Pre-MSc programme Apply via Progress, no later than 6 weeks before starting the Research Paper. See the information on the FEB infonet. Master’s information days November and April/May Follow-on Master’s degree programmes Entry requirements for the follow-on Master’s degree programmes Starting dates for the follow-on Master’s degree programmes

Dependent of the choice of your Pre-MSc programme Completion of the Pre-MSc programme 1 September and 1 February.

75


D.


D.1.

MSc Accountancy en Controlling

D.1.1.


Opleidingsdirecteur: dr. E.P. Jansen, 050-363 6382, [email protected] Opleidingscoördinator: mw. I.M. Luttmer-Noest, 050-363 3768, [email protected] Afstudeercoördinator: n.n.b. Secretariaat: mw. E.H. van der Voort-Toisuta, 050-363 3768, [email protected] Studieadvies: Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/studentsupport/masterstudent Taal: Nederlands Doel/inhoud De masteropleiding Accountancy en Controlling richt zich op de betrouwbaarheid van informatie voor de besturing van organisaties en voor het afleggen van verantwoording over het gevoerde beleid aan de interne en externe stakeholders. In de masteropleiding richt het traject Accountancy zich met name op de bestuurlijke informatie ten behoeve van de externe stakeholders, terwijl het traject Controlling vooral is gericht op het verstrekken van bestuurlijke informatie aan de interne stakeholders. In de masteropleiding worden de gebieden accountancy en controlling, waarvan de basis is gelegd in de bacheloropleiding Accountancy en Controlling, verbreed en verder uitgediept. Het traject Accountancy is de laatste fase van het wetenschappelijk deel van de opleiding tot accountant en vormt de basis voor de aansluitende postinitiële opleiding EMA (Executive Master of Accountancy) die tezamen met de verplichte praktijkstage opleidt tot Registeraccountant. Het traject Controlling is de laatste fase van het wetenschappelijke deel van de opleiding tot controller en is de basis voor de postinitiële opleiding EMFC (Executive Master of Finance and Control) die opleidt tot Registercontroller. De opleidingen voor de functies van accountant en controller lopen in de voorafgaande bacheloropleiding Accountancy en Controlling geheel en in de masteropleiding Accountancy en Controlling deels parallel met daarin vakken als IC: Ontwerpen BIS, Strategie- en Organisatie in de Praktijk en IC: Risk Management. Gericht op de functie van de accountant vindt in deze masteropleiding een verdere verdieping plaats op de gebieden financial accounting en auditing. Gericht op de functie van de controller wordt een verdere verdieping aangeboden op de gebieden management accounting & control en financiering. De opleiding wordt voor beide trajecten afgesloten met een masterafstudeerwerkstuk.

76


De masteropleiding Accountancy en Controlling heeft twee instroommomenten: september en februari. Carrièreperspectieven De meeste afgestudeerden zullen kiezen voor een aansluitende anderhalfjarige (parttime) postinitiële opleiding EMA die opleidt tot Registeraccountant (RA), of voor de 2,5 jarige (parttime) postinitiële opleiding EMFC die opleidt tot Registercontroller (RC). De postinitiële opleiding EMA die opleidt tot Registeraccountant kan tegelijk worden gevolgd met een (verplichte) driejarige praktijkstage bij een accountantskantoor of dienst. Meer informatie hieromtrent kan worden verkregen bij de bovengenoemde coördinator. De postinitiële opleiding EMFC die opleidt tot Registercontroller, kan worden gevolgd nadat enige ervaring in de functie van (assistent-) controller is opgedaan. Meer informatie over deze opleiding kan worden verkregen bij het secretariaat van de Controllersopleiding, tel. 050-363 7297. Gelet op de brede bedrijfswetenschappelijke basis en de specialisatie in de gebieden accountancy en controlling, biedt het masterdiploma van beide trajecten diverse mogelijkheden voor functies in het bedrijfsleven, zoals financieel manager, informatiemanager, hoofd administratie, systeem-ontwerper, assistent-accountant en assistent-controller. D.1.2.


V = Verplicht; K = Keuze; KG = Keuzegroep; EN = onderwijs wordt in het Engels gegeven; NL = onderwijs wordt in het Nederlands gegeven; zie ook de vakbeschrijvingen in Ocasys. Opleiding: Studiejaar: Profiel: sem 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1 NB

MSc Accountancy & Controlling/A&C 1 Accountancy

vaknaam Auditing I Financial Accounting Theory Strategie en organisatie in de praktijk Internal Control: Risk Management Internal Control: Ontw. Best. Inf.syst. Masterafstudeerwerkstuk Accountancy Auditing II

vakcode EBM821A10 EBM863A05 EBM636A05 EBM883A05 EBM807A10 EBM869A20 EBM898A05

EC V/K taal 10 V NL 5 V NL 5 V NL 5 V EN 10 V NL 20 V NL 5 V NL

Het Masterafstudeerwerkstuk Accountancy wordt gegeven in sem. I + II. Studenten die in februari starten met de MSc A&C (Accountancy) moeten rekening houden met de volgende verschuivingen: · Financial Accounting Theory in sem. IIa, · Strategie en organisatie in de praktijk in sem. IIb, · Masterafstudeerwerkstuk Accountancy in sem. II en I.

77


Opleiding: Studiejaar: Profiel: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1 NB

D.1.3.

MSc Accountancy & Controlling/A&C 1 Controlling

vaknaam Management Accounting Change Management Accounting Techniques Strategie en organisatie in de praktijk Financiering III A&C/FE Internal Control: Risk Management Internal Control: Ontw. Best. Inf.syst. Masterafstudeerwerkstuk Controlling Research in Management Control

vakcode EBM711B05 EBM057A05 EBM636A05 EBM864B05 EBM883A05 EBM807A10 EBM870A20 EBM082A05

EC V/K taal 5 V EN 5 V EN 5 V NL 5 V NL 5 V EN 10 V NL 20 V NL 5 V EN

Het Masterafstudeerwerkstuk Controlling wordt gegeven in sem. I + II. Studenten die in februari starten met de MSc A&C (Controlling) moeten rekening houden met de volgende verschuivingen: · Management Accounting Techniques in sem. IIa, · Strategie en organisatie in de praktijk in sem. IIb, · Masterafstudeerwerkstuk Controlling in sem. II + I.


Zie hoofdstuk F.2.2. D.1.4.

Regels en keuzes

Regels en keuzes MSc Accountancy en Controlling Mastervoorlichting November en april/mei, met informatie over de twee profielen. Toelatingseis master BSc Accountancy en Controlling of diploma HBO-Bedrijfsseconomie en afgerond schakelprogramma A&C voor HBO-BE Instroommomenten master 1 september en 1 februari Ingangseisen mastervakken Ingangseisen masterafstudeerwerkstuk


78

Zie de vakbeschrijvingen in Ocasys. het masterprogramma is goedgekeurd en 10 EC van het masterprogramma (inclusief vrijstellingen) is behaald. Aanvragen via Progress, uiterlijk 6 weken vóór de start van het masterafstudeerwerkstuk. Zie ook de informatie op FEB-infonet.


Postinitiële doorstroommasters

voor traject Accountancy: EMA, leidt (samen met de verplichte praktijkstage) tot de titel Registeraccountant (RA) voor traject Controlling: EMFC, leidt tot de titel Registercontroller (RC)

79


D.1.5.

Programmabeschrijving MSc A&C voor HBO-AC

Doel/inhoud Het aangepaste masterprogramma Accountancy & Controlling: traject Accountancy voor studenten HBO-AC is bedoeld om studenten kennis en vaardigheden bij te brengen op het niveau van de reguliere masteropleiding Accountancy & Controlling, traject Accountancy, waarbij rekening wordt gehouden met de vooropleiding van de studenten. Het programma heeft als doel om gespecialiseerde wetenschappelijke kennis, vaardigheden en inzicht op het gebied van economie, bedrijfskunde en accountancy bij te brengen. Het programma is de laatste fase van het wetenschappelijk deel van de opleiding tot accountant en de afronding wordt beloond met een masterdiploma. Het masterprogramma vormt de basis voor de aansluitende (theoretische) postinitiële opleiding EMA (Executive Master of Accountancy) die opleidt tot Registeraccountant. De accountantsfunctie richt zich in de eerste plaats op de kwaliteit (waaronder betrouwbaarheid) van de interne en externe informatievoorziening ten behoeve van de besturing en beheersing van (profit en non-profit) organisaties en de besluitvorming door de verschillende stakeholders. Het programma omvat vakken als Internal Control: Ontwerpen Bestuurlijke Informatiesystemen, Financial Accounting Theory, Strategie- en Organisatie in de Praktijk en Internal Control: Risk Management. Het programma wordt afgesloten met een masterafstudeerwerkstuk. NB: Het betreft een voltijds masterprogramma waarvan de cursussen veelal op de vrijdag en soms op donderdagmiddag worden ingeroosterd. Het aangepast masterprogramma Accountancy & Controlling, traject Controlling voor studenten HBO-AC is bedoeld om studenten kennis en vaardigheden bij te brengen op het niveau van de reguliere masteropleiding Accountancy & Controlling, traject Controlling, waarbij rekening wordt gehouden met de vooropleiding van de studenten. Het programma heeft als doel om gespecialiseerde wetenschappelijke kennis, vaardigheden en inzicht op het gebied van bedrijfseconomie, bedrijfskunde en controlling bij te brengen. Het programma is de laatste fase van het wetenschappelijk deel van de opleiding tot registercontroller en de afronding wordt beloond met een masterdiploma. Het masterprogramma vormt de basis voor de aansluitende (theoretische) postinitiële opleiding EMFC (Executive Master of Finance and Control) die opleidt tot Registercontroller. De functie van controller richt zich in de eerste plaats op de kwaliteit (w.o. betrouwbaarheid) van de interne en externe informatievoorziening ten behoeve van de besturing en beheersing van (profit en non-profit) organisaties en de besluitvorming door de verschillende stakeholders. Het programma omvat vakken als Internal Control: Ontwerpen Bestuurlijke Informatiesystemen, Financiering III A&C/FE, Strategie- en Organisatie in de Praktijk, Internal Control:

80


Risk Management, en Research in Management Control. Het programma wordt afgesloten met een masterafstudeerwerkstuk. De masteropleiding Accountancy & Controlling voor HBO-AC heeft twee instroommomenten: september en februari. Carrièreperspectieven De meeste afgestudeerden van de MSc A&C, Accountancy zullen kiezen voor de aansluitende 1,5-jarige (parttime) postinitiële opleiding EMA die opleidt tot Registeraccountant (RA). Deze opleiding wordt verzorgd door de Faculteit Economie en Bedrijfskunde. De postinitiële opleiding voor Registeraccountant kan tegelijk worden gevolgd met een (verplichte) 3-jarige praktijkstage bij een accountantskantoor of -dienst. Meer informatie hieromtrent is te verkrijgen bij bovengenoemde coördinator. Gelet op de brede bedrijfseconomische/bedrijfskundige basis en de specialisatie op het terrein van de accountancy, biedt het masterdiploma Accountancy & Controlling: traject Accountancy diverse mogelijkheden voor functies in het bedrijfsleven, zoals financieel manager, informatiemanager, hoofd administratie, systeem-ontwerper, assistent-accountant en assistent-controller. De meeste afgestudeerden van de MSc A&C, Controlling zullen kiezen voor de aansluitende (parttime) postinitiële opleiding EMFC die opleidt tot Registercontroller (RC). Deze opleiding wordt verzorgd door de Faculteit Economie en Bedrijfskunde. De postinitiële opleiding EMFC kan worden gevolgd nadat enige ervaring in de functie van (assistent-) controller is opgedaan. Meer informatie over deze opleiding is te verkrijgen bij het secretariaat van de Controllersopleiding, tel. 050-363 7297. Gelet op de brede bedrijfseconomische/bedrijfskundige basis en de specialisatie op het terrein van de controlling, biedt het masterdiploma Accountancy & Controlling, traject Controlling, diverse mogelijkheden voor functies in het bedrijfsleven, zoals financieel manager, informatiemanager, hoofd administratie, systeemontwerper, assistent-controller. D.1.6.

Overzicht studieprogramma MSc A&C voor HBO-AC

V = Verplicht; K = Keuze; KG = Keuzegroep; EN = onderwijs wordt in het Engels gegeven; NL = onderwijs wordt in het Nederlands gegeven; zie ook de vakbeschrijvingen in Ocasys. Opleiding: Studiejaar: Profiel: sem 1.1-2 1.1

MSc Accountancy & Controlling/A&C 1 Accountancy voor HBO-AC

vaknaam Masterafstudeerwerkstuk Accountancy Financial Accounting Theory

vakcode EBM869A20 EBM863A05

EC V/K taal 20 V NL 5 V NL

81


1.1 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 2.2 NB

Strategie en organisatie in de praktijk Internal Control: Risk Management Internal Control: Ontw. Best. Inf.syst. Auditing II Theoretische inleid. Auditing & Control Financiering A&C

NB

D.1.7.

5 5 10 5 5 5

V V V V V V

NL EN NL NL NL NL

Het Masterafstudeerwerkstuk Accountancy wordt gegeven in sem. I + II. Studenten die in februari starten met de MSc A&C (Accountancy voor HBO-AC) moeten rekening houden met de volgende verschuivingen: · Financial Accounting Theory in sem. IIa, · Strategie en organisatie in de praktijk in sem. IIb, · Masterafstudeerwerkstuk Accountancy in sem. II + I.

Opleiding: Studiejaar: Profiel: sem 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1

EBM636A05 EBM883A05 EBM807A10 EBM898A05 EBB943A05 EBB823C05

MSc Accountancy & Controlling/A&C 1 Controlling voor HBO-AC

vaknaam Masterafstudeerwerkstuk Controlling Management Accounting Change Strategie en organisatie in de praktijk Financiering III A&C/FE Internal Control: Risk Management Internal Control: Ontw. Best. Inf.syst. Research in Management Control Theoretische inleid. Auditing & Control

vakcode EBM870A20 EBM711B05 EBM636A05 EBM864B05 EBM883A05 EBM807A10 EBM082A05 EBB943A05

EC V/K taal 20 V NL 5 V EN 5 V NL 5 V NL 5 V EN 10 V NL 5 V EN 5 V NL

Het Masterafstudeerwerkstuk Controlling wordt gegeven in sem. I + II. Studenten die in februari starten met de MSc A&C (Controlling voor HBO-AC) moeten rekening houden met de volgende verschuivingen: · Management Accounting Techniques in sem. IIa, · Strategie en organisatie in de praktijk in sem. IIb, · Masterafstudeerwerkstuk Controlling in sem. II + I.

Regels en keuzes MSc A&C voor HBO-AC

Regels en keuzes MSc A&C voor HBO-AC Mastervoorlichting November en april/mei, met informatie over de twee profielen Toelatingseis master diploma HBO Accountancy, inclusief een voldoende resultaat voor de Overall Toets (OAT) en afgerond schakelprogramma A&C voor HBO-AC of

82


Instroommomenten master

diploma HBO Accountancy zonder een voldoende resultaat voor de Overall Toets (OAT) en afgerond schakelprogramma A&C voor HBO-BE 1 september en 1 februari

Ingangseisen mastervakken


Ingangseisen masterafstudeerwerkstuk


Postinitiële doorstroommasters

het masterprogramma is goedgekeurd en 10 EC van het masterprogramma (inclusief vrijstellingen) is behaald. Aanvragen via Progress, uiterlijk 6 weken vóór de start van het masterafstudeerwerkstuk. Zie ook de informatie op FEB-infonet. voor traject Accountancy: EMA, leidt (samen met de verplichte praktijkstage) tot de titel Registeraccountant (RA) voor traject Controlling: EMFC, leidt tot de titel Registercontroller (RC)

83


D.2.

MSc BA – Change Management

D.2.1.


Programme Director: Prof. A. Boonstra, [email protected], 050-363 7289 Programme Coordinator: Dr C. Reezigt, [email protected], 050-363 3858 Secretary: Mrs J.M. Wiersema, [email protected], 050-363 6543 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Language: English Objectives and content Changing, i.e. responding to market and other developments, tends to be essential for the survival of today's organizations. To organize is to change and to change is to organize. In the past, change management was a subject only addressed incidentally: once a business had been through a process of change, it was time for a period of consolidation. However, nowadays change is a crucial and permanently topical matter for organizations. This in turn creates a need for change experts, who know how to design and how to manage change processes that simultaneously take place in areas such as business processes, information technology, strategy, leadership style and human resource management. The MSc BA profile Change Management will train these experts. As a participant in this programme you gain insight into the processes behind change, the impact that changes may have on an organization and its members, and the role change managers (line managers or internal or external consultants) may play in this. More specifically, you will learn about different change strategies that have been developed, including intervention tools that are helpful for implementing those strategies. You will also acquire the communicative and social skills needed to manage change programmes, on individual, group as well as organization levels. Furthermore, you will learn how to conduct research into change management related subjects. To fulfill the programme requirements, you need to follow: four mandatory courses (5 ECs each, 20 ECs in total): Theories and Approaches of Change Management; Change & Human factors; Managing Technological Change; and Agents and Instruments of Change. three electives of 5 ECs, each which enable you to specialize further in fields such as strategy and ICT. Furthermore, a substantial part of the programme (20 ECs) is devoted to writing a thesis including conducting research. This individual work is facilitated and supported in a 5 ECs course, labeled ‘Research & Skills’. This is an ongoing workshop to help you link theory to practice and research.

84


You will also train and develop your academic, social and communication skills and form an academic attitude. A combination of teaching methods is used, including lectures, seminars, tutorials, case studies and projects. Assessment is through essays, exams, reports, case studies, industry-based assignments, presentations and a master thesis. The MSc BA – Change Management starts twice a year: September and February. Career prospects After completing the Master’s degree, you are able to work independently as a change manager within organizations. You are flexible and can develop in many directions, for example through consultancy projects. You can start working as a management trainee, an internal consultant, a policy consultant or as a member of a project team in profit as well as non-profit organizations. A quarter of all graduates of Business Administration find jobs in consultancy. Graduates of Change Management are particularly well equipped for this. D.2.2.

Degree programme

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 NB

MSc BA - Change Management 1 core programme MSc BA Change Management

course title elective(s) MSc BA Change Man (see list) Change and Human Factors Theories & Approaches of Change Man. Research & Skills for MSc BA Master’s Thesis BA Change Management Agents and Instruments of Change Managing Technological Change

code EBM053A05 EBM055A05 EBM050A05 EBM724A20 EBM052A05 EBM054A05

EC 15 5 5 5 20 5 5

C/E lang C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN

If you start the MSc BA Change Management in February please note the following changes: · Research & Skills for MSc BA in sem. IIb, · Master’s Thesis BA Change Management in sem. I.

85


Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 NB

86

MSc BA - Change Management 1 electives MSc BA Change Management

course title Business Ethics Developing for Markets HRM & International Labour Law IT Governance Organization Design (MSc) Retail Marketing Strategic Marketing for non-Marketing Behavioural Operations Management Brand & Product Management Business Process Innovation and Change Financial Reporting (MSc) Healthcare Operations International Strategic Alliances Managerial Decision Making and Control Operations Management in Proc. Industry Personnel Economics Strategic Management & Technology Comparative Corporate Governance Conflict Man. & Industrial Relations Consumer Psychology Innovation in Healthcare Organizations Inventory Management Policies for a Dynamic Economy Process Improvement & Quality Control Purchasing Working Capital Management B2B Marketing Behavioural Perspectives on Corp. Gov. Emerging Markets (MSc) Franchising Innovation & Entrepreneurship Service Operations

code EBM043A05 EBM062A05 EBM733A05 EBM048A05 EBM049A05 EBM880A05 EBM140A05 EBM032A05 EBM073A05 EBM044A05 EBM045A05 EBM034A05 EBM090A05 EBM027A05 EBM725C05 EBM678A05 EBM051A05 EBM083A05 EBM673A05 EBM074A05 EBM047A05 EBM026A05 EBM065A05 EBM036A05 EBM037A05 EBM645A05 EBM808B05 EBM023A05 EBM085A05 EBM046A05 EBM621A05 EBM634A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN

The MSc BA is responsible for the following electives: Business Ethics, IT governance, Organization Design (MSc), Business Process Innovation and Change, Financial Reporting (MSc), Strategic Management & Technology, Business Diagnosis and Design, Innovation in Healthcare Organizations, Working Capital Management, Franchising. The other electives are managed by other Master programmes.


D.2.3.


See Section F.2.5. D.2.4.

Rules and choices

Rules and choices MSc in BA - Change Management Master’s information days November and April/May Entry requirements for the Master’s degree programme

Bachelor’s degree in Business Administration, or Business Economics, or Econometrics and Operations Research, or Economics and Business Economics, or International Business, or Technology Management or completed Pre-MSc BA CM programme, and

Starting dates for the Master’s degree programme Entry requirements for Master’s courses

Entry requirements for the Master’s Thesis

Approval of the Master’s programme

sufficient command of English. For entry requirements with other bachelor’s degrees, see Section 5 of the MSc OER. 1 September and 1 February Consult the course descriptions in Ocasys. It is strongly recommended that applicants pass the related specialization course of this degree programme. The Master’s programme has been approved, and at least 20 ECs from the Master’s programme have been obtained Apply via Progress, no later than 6 weeks before starting the Master’s Thesis. See the information on the FEB infonet.

87


D.3.

MSc BA – Organizational and Management Control

D.3.1.


Programme Director: Prof. A. Boonstra, [email protected], 050-363 7289 Programme Coordinator: Dr S. Tillema,s.tillemarug.nl, 050-363 4539 Secretariat: I.J. Bakker MSc, [email protected], 050-363 3535 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Language: English Aim/content The MSc BA - Organizational and Management Control (O&MC) profile concentrates on the knowledge and skills that contribute to good guidance and management of organizations. The specialization offers you the chance to learn about accounting and controlling methods and techniques. These are used to provide (non-)financial information and to develop systems for the use of planning and controlling organizational activities. These methods and techniques will be placed in the context of general management and related issues, such as strategy, and changes to these. In this course you will train and develop your academic, social and communication skills and form an academic attitude. A combination of teaching methods is used, including lectures, seminars, tutorials, case studies and projects. Assessment is through essays, exams, reports, case studies, industry-based assignments, presentations and a master thesis. To fulfill the programme requirements, you need to follow four mandatory courses (5 ECs each, 20 ECs in total): 1 Management Accounting Change; 2 Management Accounting Techniques; 3 Financial Management for O&MC; and 4 Research in Management Control. These courses provide you with a thorough knowledge in the field of management accounting and control and the financial management of organizations. Depending on your personal preferences, you can choose three electives from a list of relevant optional courses (5 ECs each, 15 ECs in total). The O&MC profile offers the possibility to diversify by combining electives from different organizational fields, as well as to specialize in specific themes. Depending on your choices, a further emphasis can be on topics in the field of (for example) financial accounting and finance, strategy, innovation, or health care. Furthermore, a substantial (20 ECs) part of the programme is devoted to writing a thesis including conducting research. This individual work is facilitated and supported in a 5 ECs course, labeled ‘Research & Skills’. This is an ongoing workshop to help you link theory to practice and research.

88


The MSc BA – Organizational and Management Control starts twice a year: September and February. Career prospects As a graduate of the MSc BA - O&MC profile you may find job opportunities in national and international companies, non-profit organizations or government institutions. This includes (business-unit) controller, financial officer, financial and/or management consultant, assistant manager, management trainee, project manager, researcher and various other positions. D.3.2.

Degree programme

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 NB

course title elective(s) MSc BA O&MC (see list) Management Accounting Change Management Accounting Techniques Research & Skills for MSc BA Master’s Thesis BA O&MC Financial Management for O&MC Research in Management Control

code EBM711B05 EBM057A05 EBM050A05 EBM859A20 EBM056A05 EBM082A05

EC 15 5 5 5 20 5 5


If you start the MSc BA O&MC in February please note the following changes: · Management Accounting Techniques in sem. IIa, · Research & Skills for MSc BA in sem. IIb, · Master’s Thesis BA O&MC in sem. I

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1

MSc BA - Organizational & Management Control/O&MC 1 core programme MSc BA O&MC

MSc BA - Organizational & Management Control/O&MC 1 electives MSc BA O&MC

course title Business Ethics Developing for Markets HRM & International Labour Law IT Governance Organization Design (MSc) Retail Marketing Strategic Marketing for non-Marketing

code EBM043A05 EBM062A05 EBM733A05 EBM048A05 EBM049A05 EBM880A05 EBM140A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN

89


1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 NB

D.3.3.

Behavioural Operations Management Brand & Product Management Business Process Innovation and Change Financial Reporting (MSc) Healthcare Operations International Strategic Alliances Operations Management in Proc. Industry Personnel Economics Strategic Management & Technology Comparative Corporate Governance Conflict Man. & Industrial Relations Consumer Psychology Innovation in Healthcare Organizations Inventory Management Policies for a Dynamic Economy Process Improvement & Quality Control Purchasing Working Capital Management B2B Marketing Behavioural Perspectives on Corp. Gov. Emerging Markets (MSc) Franchising Innovation & Entrepreneurship Service Operations

EBM032A05 EBM073A05 EBM044A05 EBM045A05 EBM034A05 EBM090A05 EBM725C05 EBM678A05 EBM051A05 EBM083A05 EBM673A05 EBM074A05 EBM047A05 EBM026A05 EBM065A05 EBM036A05 EBM037A05 EBM645A05 EBM808B05 EBM023A05 EBM085A05 EBM046A05 EBM621A05 EBM634A05

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E

EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN




Rules and choices

Rules and choices MSc in BA - Organizational and Management Control Master’s information days November and April/May Entry requirements for the Master’s degree programme

90

Bachelor’s degree in Business Administration, or Business Economics, or Econometrics and Operations Research, or Economics and Business Economics, or


International Business, or Technology Management or completed Pre-MSc BA O&MC programme, and


sufficient command of English. For entry requirements with other bachelor’s degrees, see Section 5 of the MSc OER. 1 September and 1 February Consult the course descriptions in Ocasys.


The Master’s programme has been approved, and


at least 20 ECs from the Master’s programme have been obtained Apply via Progress, no later than 6 weeks before starting the Master’s Thesis. See the information on the FEB infonet.

91


D.4.

MSc BA – Small Business and Entrepreneurship

D.4.1.


Programme Director: Prof. A. Boonstra, [email protected], 050-363 7289 Programme Coordinator: Dr C.H.M. Lutz, [email protected], 050-363 7339 Secretary: Mrs K. van Brummelen, [email protected] and Mrs L. Torsing, [email protected], 050-363 3453 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Language: English Objectives and content The objectives of this master programme are threefold: 1 You will become familiar with the specific theories in the field of Entrepreneurship and Small Business. 2 You have learned to interpret the management and economic knowledge taught in the bachelor programme and, in particular, to apply this to Small and Medium-sized Enterprises (SMEs). 3 You will have learned that ‘doing business’ is a process in which (strategic) thinking, planning and undertaking play a key role. This process can be conducted by the entrepreneur or a third party (e.g. a consultant). After completing this programme you will have acquired relevant competencies for consultants and entrepreneurs. Currently, ‘Small Business’ and ‘Entrepreneurship’ are getting a lot of attention. A consensus is growing among policy makers, researchers and various stakeholders, that the dynamics in the economy and the growth of employment are mainly the result of start-ups and growing small businesses. An increasing number of large firms are targeting SMEs as a specific segment in the market. Consultancy firms adapt their services to the specific needs of SMEs. Banks and insurance companies have established SME departments in order to develop specific services for this target group. Other large companies understand that they need enterprising employees in order to survive in the modern economy. In their organizations the departments become smaller and operate more independently, while responsibilities are located as low as possible in the organization and, therefore, these firms require employees with an enterprising attitude. Finally, a growing number of people prefer to become responsible for their own employment and start their own business. If you expect to become active in the SME sector in the future, then this MSc BA profile in Small Business and Entrepreneurship is highly relevant. The specific organizational characteristics of smaller firms are addressed in this profile. Basically, all sub-disciplines of management and organization are dealt with. Also questions such as ‘what is entrepreneurship?’, ‘am I suitable to be an entrepreneur?’ and various issues of consultancy and, in particular, consultancy for SMEs, will be addressed. As SMEs are quite restricted in the number of specialists they employ, they depend on consultants to a relatively large extent. All these topics are presented

92


in four compulsory courses of 5 ECs each in the master programme: ‘Small Business Management’, ‘Strategic Analysis for Small Business’, ‘New Ventures & Entrepreneurship’ and ‘Small Business Economics & Policy’. Three electives of 5 ECs each enable you to specialize further in fields such as strategy, marketing and management of technology. Furthermore, a substantial (20 ECs) part of the programme is devoted to writing a thesis including doing research. This individual work is facilitated and supported in a 5 ECs course, labeled ‘Research & Skills for MSc BA’. This ongoing workshop helps you to link theory to practice and research. The MSc BA – Small Business and Entrepreneurship starts twice a year: September and February. Career prospects This MSc BA degree programme prepares you for the following types of employment: ‘All-round’ manager for SMEs; Entrepreneur: start your own business (family business); SME consultant in entrepreneurship and change management; Manager in larger organizations that require employees with an entrepreneurial attitude (intrapreneurship); and Manager in large organizations that deal with SMEs (banks, accountants, (semi-)government, franchise organizations). D.4.2.

Degree programme

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 NB

MSc BA - Small Business & Entrepreneurship/SB&E 1 core programme SB&E

course title elective(s) MSc BA SB&E (see list) Small Business Management Strategic Analysis for Small Business Business Diagnosis and Design Research & Skills for MSc BA Master’s Thesis BA SB&E New Ventures & Entrepreneurship Small Business Economics & Policy


EC 10 5 5 5 5 20 5 5


If you start the MSc BA SB&E in February please note the following changes: · Research & Skills for MSc BA in IIb, · Master’s Thesis BA SB&E in sem. I.

93


Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 NB

94

MSc BA - Small Business & Entrepreneurship/SB&E 1 electives MSc BA SB&E

course title Business Ethics Developing for Markets HRM & International Labour Law IT Governance Organization Design (MSc) Retail Marketing Strategic Marketing for non-Marketing Behavioural Operations Management Brand & Product Management Business Process Innovation and Change Financial Reporting (MSc) Healthcare Operations International Strategic Alliances Managerial Decision Making and Control Operations Management in Proc. Industry Personnel Economics Strategic Management & Technology Comparative Corporate Governance Conflict Man. & Industrial Relations Consumer Psychology Innovation in Healthcare Organizations Inventory Management Policies for a Dynamic Economy Process Improvement & Quality Control Purchasing Working Capital Management B2B Marketing Behavioural Perspectives on Corp. Gov. Emerging Markets (MSc) Franchising Innovation & Entrepreneurship Service Operations

code EBM043A05 EBM062A05 EBM733A05 EBM048A05 EBM049A05 EBM880A05 EBM140A05 EBM032A05 EBM073A05 EBM044A05 EBM045A05 EBM034A05 EBM090A05 EBM027A05 EBM725C05 EBM678A05 EBM051A05 EBM083A05 EBM673A05 EBM074A05 EBM047A05 EBM026A05 EBM065A05 EBM036A05 EBM037A05 EBM645A05 EBM808B05 EBM023A05 EBM085A05 EBM046A05 EBM621A05 EBM634A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN



D.4.3.



Rules and choices

Rules and choices MSc in BA - Small Business & Entrepreneurship Master’s information days November and April/May Entry requirements for the Master’s degree programme

Bachelor’s degree in Business Administration, or Business Economics, or Econometrics and Operations Research, or Economics and Business Economics, or International Business, or Technology Management or completed Pre-MSc BA SB&E programme, and




sufficient command of English. For entry requirements with other bachelor’s degrees, see Section 5 of the MSc OER. 1 September and 1 February Consult the course descriptions in Ocasys. It is recommended that applicants pass the related specialization course of this degree programme. The Master’s programme has been approved, and at least 20 ECs from the Master’s programme have been obtained Apply via Progress, no later than 6 weeks before starting the Master’s Thesis. See the information on the FEB infonet.

95


D.5.

MSc BA – Strategic Innovation Management

D.5.1.


Programme Director: Prof. A. Boonstra, [email protected], 050-363 7289 Programme Coordinator: Dr T.L.J. Broekhuizen, [email protected], 050-363 3777 Secretary: Mrs L. Torsing, [email protected], 050-363 3453 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Language: English Objectives and content The MSc BA - SIM programme focuses on the strategic management of innovation. You will receive academic training to gain a comprehensive understanding of the strategic aspects of managing innovations - from the early development phase (idea generation, resource garnering, formation of strategic alliances) until the commercialization phase (launch, obtaining legitimacy, protecting and capturing value from innovations). In particular, you learn about the variety and importance of innovation, the complexity of organizing and managing innovations, the strategies to obtain early success and appropriate value from innovations. The emphasis of SIM is on how organizations can successfully manage innovations at the intra-level (within the organization; organization and collaboration of (crossfunctional) teams) and inter-level (between organizations: organization and collaboration between organizations and networks). To understand the context in which organizations have to strategically operate, you also learn about the influence of market characteristics, and the role of competitors, consumers, and institutional actors (regulators/policy makers and gatekeepers) in shaping innovation success. Finally, you will learn about how internal capabilities and resources can be coupled with strategies to influence innovation success. To fulfill the programme requirements, you need to follow four mandatory courses (5 ECs each, 20 ECs in total), three electives (5 ECs each, 15 ECs in total), a research clinic (5 ECs), and write your Master thesis (20 ECs). The four mandatory courses are: Organizing for Innovation, Strategy & Innovation Management, Capturing Value from Innovation, Cooperating for Innovation. During the programme you train and develop your academic, social and communication skills and form an academic attitude. A combination of teaching methods is used, including lectures, seminars, tutorials, case studies and projects. Assessment is through essays, exams, reports, case studies, industry-based assignments, presentations and a master thesis. SIM students learn to apply a variety of qualitative and quantitative research methods. The MSc BA - SIM starts twice a year: September and February.

96


Career prospects After completing the Master’s degree, you will understand the complex and unpredictable nature of managing innovations, and you are able to apply acquired knowledge and research techniques to come up with relevant recommendations for strategic management to enhance an organization's innovation success. Future job opportunities are in the field of strategic management, innovation management, business development, consultancy, and research - for both the private and public sector. D.5.2.

Degree programme

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 NB

course title elective(s) MSc BA SIM A (see list) elective(s) MSc BA SIM B (see list) Organizing for Innovation Strategy & Innovation Management Research & Skills for MSc BA Master’s Thesis BA SIM Capturing Value from Innovation Cooperating for Innovation

NB

code

EBM064A05 EBM066A05 EBM050A05 EBM723B20 EBM738A05 EBM061A05

EC 5 10 5 5 5 20 5 5


If you start the MSc BA SIM in February please note the following changes: · Research & Skills for MSc BA in sem. IIb, · Master’s Thesis BA SIM in sem. I

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.2 2.2

MSc BA - Strategic Innovation Management/SIM 1 core programma MSc BA SIM

MSc BA - Strategic Innovation Management/SIM 1 elective MSc BA SIM A

course title Developing for Markets Developing from Technologies Innovation & Entrepreneurship

code EBM062A05 EBM063A05 EBM621A05

EC 5 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN E EN

Students choose 5 ECs from ‘electives MSc BA SIM A’ (see list).

97


Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 NB

D.5.3.

MSc BA - Strategic Innovation Management/SIM 1 electives MSc BA SIM B

course title Business Ethics Competitiveness of Firms and Nations Strategic Marketing for non-Marketing Brand & Product Management Innovation in Services International Strategic Alliances Strategic Management & Technology Comparative Corporate Governance Conflict Man. & Industrial Relations Innovation in Healthcare Organizations Policies for a Dynamic Economy Behavioural Perspectives on Corp. Gov. Corporate Governance for MSc Finance Franchising

code EBM043A05 EBM092A05 EBM140A05 EBM073A05 EBM736C05 EBM090A05 EBM051A05 EBM083A05 EBM673A05 EBM047A05 EBM065A05 EBM023A05 EBM811C05 EBM046A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN

Students choose 10 ECs from ‘electives MSc BA SIM B’ (see list) and/or courses from ‘electives MSc BA SIM A’ which they have not already taken.



Rules and choices

Rules and choices MSc in BA – Strategic Innovation Management Master’s information days November and April/May Entry requirements for the Master’s degree programme

Bachelor’s degree in Business Administration, or Business Economics, or Econometrics and Operations Research, or Economics and Business Economics, or International Business, or Technology Management or completed Pre-MSc BA SIM programme, and sufficient command of English. For entry requirements with other bachelor’s degrees, see Section 5 of the MSc OER.

98





1 September and 1 February Consult the course descriptions in Ocasys. It is recommended that applicants pass the related specialization course of this degree programme. The Master’s programme has been approved, and at least 20 ECs from the Master’s programme have been obtained Apply via Progress, no later than 6 weeks before starting the Master’s Thesis. See the information on the FEB infonet.

99


D.6.

MSc Econometrics, Operations Research and Actuarial Studies

D.6.1.


Programme Director: Prof. M.H. van der Vlerk, [email protected], 050-363 3816 Secretary: Mrs E.M. Baars-Drent, [email protected] and/or Mrs M.A. Koolman, [email protected], 050-363 7018 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Language: English Objectives and content The programme in Econometrics, Operations Research and Actuarial Studies (EORAS) aims at the description and analysis of problems in economics, management and related areas through mathematical models. Acquiring a research oriented attitude, on the one hand, and knowledge of the most important models used, on the other, form the main ingredients of the programme, together with the ability to transform the outcome of the models in relevant results for the field of application. The Specialization Actuarial Studies is especially concerned with topics related to insurance: life insurance, risk insurance and reinsurance. Insurance is closely related to investment strategies, social security, negotiations between employers and employees on pensions, etc. The intrinsic uncertainties in the field make tools like econometrics and statistics indispensable. The curriculum consists of three advanced actuarial courses, three courses to be chosen from the complete set of courses for the master EORAS, two courses in quantitative economics and a master’s thesis. The topic of the Master’s thesis must be in the field of actuarial science. The Specialization Econometrics is especially concerned with the interpretation of observed (economic) data. A data set is modelled in order to find or verify relations within it, either for simulation or forecasting, or for policy decisions. Traditionally macroeconomics has been an important field of application for econometrics. Modern econometrics, however, also considers applications in other fields such as financial economics, marketing or consumer behaviour. The curriculum consists of three advanced econometric courses, three courses to be chosen from the complete set of courses for the master EORAS, two courses in quantitative economics and a master’s thesis. The topic of the master’s thesis has to be in the field of econometrics, statistics or mathematical economics. The Specialization Operations Research programme is especially concerned with decision problems in logistics and finance, like vehicle routing, time schedules for railway systems, supply management, production planning, service planning, queuing, investment, portfolio management or asset liability management. Both deterministic and stochastic models are used.

100


The curriculum consists of three advanced operations research courses, three courses to be chosen from the complete set of courses for the master EORAS, two courses in quantitative economics and a master’s thesis. The topic of the master’s thesis has to be in the field of operations research. The MSc Econometrics, Operations Research and Actuarial Studies starts twice a year: September (preferred in view of intended order of modules and feasibility of internship) and February. Career prospects Graduates generally are very successful in finding a job. Acquiring a PhD position is a possibility or employment in institutions or companies. Graduates in actuarial studies1 PhD position in Actuarial science, statistics, economics, management sciences or one the the social studies Institutions and companies Financial institutions such as banks, insurance companies and pension funds Graduates in econometrics PhD position in Institutions and companies

Econometrics, economics, statistics, or one of the social sciences Traditional institutions like CBS and government Financial institutions such as banks, insurance companies and pension funds

Graduates in operations research PhD position in Operations Research, management sciences or one of the social sciences Institutions and companies Almost all large companies, hospitals, TNO, State departments such as the Ministry of Infrastructure and Environment (Rijkswaterstaat), (OR) consultancy firms D.6.2.

Degree programme

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details.

1

The ‘Actuarieel Instituut’ (Actuarial Institute) offers additional courses for those who want to become an actuary. Completion gives the right to carry the title ‘Actuaris AG’ (certified by the ‘Actuarieel Genootschap’; title: ‘AG’ after your name).

101


Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1

NB

course title elective(s) MSc EORAS (see list)

code

EC 10

C/E C

lang EN

10

C

EN

EBM113A05

5

C

EN

EBM114A05 EBM871A20 EBM111A05 EBM067A05

5 C 20 C 5 EG A 5 EG A

other quantitative course(s) Dependence & Extremes in Risk Management Models for Short Term Risk Management Master’s Thesis Actuarial Studies Asset and Liability Management or Banking, Insurance and Risk Management

EN EN EN EN

Students choose 5 ECs from option group A. Students choose 15 ECs from ‘electives MSc EORAS’ (see list), not including course(s) chosen from option group A. Students choose 10 ECs other, sufficiently quantative courses from FEB (incl. EORAS), MSc Mathematics, or national networks (e.g. LNMB, see www.lnmb.nl), all subject to approval. If you start the MSc EORAS in February please note the following change: · Master’s Thesis Actuarial Studies in sem. I

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1

102

MSc Econometrics, Operations Research & Actuarial Studies/EORAS 1 Actuarial Studies

MSc Econometrics, Operations Research & Actuarial Studies/EORAS 1 Econometrics


code

other quantitative course(s) Econometric Theory and Methods Econometric Inference Master’s Thesis Econometrics Applied Macroeconometrics or Applied Microeconometrics

EBM835B05 EBM021A05 EBM872A20 EBM109A05 EBM110A05

EC 10

C/E C

lang EN

10

C

EN

5 C 5 C 20 C 5 EG B 5 EG B

EN EN EN EN EN


NB

Students choose 5 ECs from option group B. Students choose 15 ECs from ‘electives MSc EORAS’ (see list), not including course(s) chosen from option group B. Students choose 10 ECs other, sufficiently quantative courses from FEB (incl. EORAS), MSc Mathematics, or national networks (e.g. LNMB, see www.lnmb.nl), all subject to approval. If you start the MSc EORAS in February please note the following change: · Master’s Thesis Econometrics in sem. I

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 NB


Stochastic Programming Combinatorial Optimization Master’s Thesis Operations Research OR Analysis of Complex Systems or Supply Chain Optimization

EBM853A05 EBM112A05 EBM873A20 EBM115A05 EBM117A05

EC 10

C/E C

lang EN

10

C

EN

5 C 5 C 20 C 5 EG C 5 EG C

EN EN EN EN EN

Students choose 5 ECs from option group C Students choose 15 ECs from ‘electives MSc EORAS’ (see list), not including course(s) chosen from option group C. Students choose 10 ECs other, sufficiently quantative courses from FEB (incl. EORAS), MSc Mathematics, or national networks (e.g. LNMB, see www.lnmb.nl), all subject to approval. If you start the MSc EORAS in February please note the following change: · Master’s Thesis Operations Research in sem. I

Year: Profile:

1.1 1.1 1.2

code

other quantitative course(s)

Programme:

sem 1.1 1.1

MSc Econometrics, Operations Research & Actuarial Studies/EORAS 1 Operations Research

MSc Econometrics, Operations Research & Actuarial Studies/EORAS 1 electives MSc EORAS

course title Advanced Industrial Organization Dependence & Extremes in Risk Management Econometric Theory and Methods Stochastic Programming Combinatorial Optimization

code EBM826A05 EBM113A05

EC 5 5

EBM835B05 EBM853A05 EBM112A05

5 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN E E E

EN EN EN

103


1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 D.6.3.

Econometric Inference Financial Econometrics Models for Short Term Risk Management Applied Macroeconometrics Applied Microeconometrics Asset and Liability Management Banking, Insurance and Risk Management OR Analysis of Complex Systems Supply Chain Optimization Capita Selecta EORAS

EBM021A05 EBM820A05 EBM114A05 EBM109A05 EBM110A05 EBM111A05 EBM067A05 EBM115A05 EBM117A05 EBM116A05

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

E E E E E E E E E E

EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN



Rules and choices

Rules and choices MSc in EORAS Master’s information days

November (FEB) and February (EORAS)

Entry requirements for the Master’s degree programme

Bachelor’s degree in Econometrics and Operations Research (RUG), and

Starting dates for the Master’s degree programme Entry requirements for Master’s courses Entry requirements for the Master’s Thesis

sufficient command of English. For entry requirements with other bachelor’s degrees, see Section 5 of the MSc OER. 1 September (preferred) and 1 February Consult the course descriptions in Ocasys. The Master’s programme has been approved, and


104



D.7.

MSc Economics

D.7.1.


Programme Director: Prof. C.L.M. Hermes, [email protected], 050-3634863 Programme Coordinator: Prof. J.P. Elhorst, [email protected], 050-3633893 Secretary: Mrs E.M. Baars-Drent, [email protected], Mrs M.A. Koolman, [email protected], 050-3637018 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Language: English Objectives and content Graduates of the Master’s degree programme in Economics are able to apply advanced economic theory so as to analyse economic issues related to society at large. The programme trains students for positions in which they contribute as economists to decision-making in (inter)national government bodies, public organizations, and private corporations like financial institutions, multinationals and consultancy firms. The objective of the programme is to teach students economic theory at a high analytical level. The main focus is on contemporary economic theories in core fields of the economics discipline. An additional goal is to familiarize students with the application of theory and research methods to economic practice and economic policy. Such a combination of rigorous academic thinking with practical applications is essential for any professional active in the fields of economics policy or research. Finally, students of the programme must be able to conduct economic research. English is the language of teaching and communication. The international character of the programme is further demonstrated by the fact that the best international textbooks available are used. In the various courses, students study papers published in prominent academic journals in order to keep up with the latest developments. Courses are taught by specialists who have an international reputation in their field of research and/or a key role in public debates. The MSc in Economics has a straightforward structure. Its main focus is on up-todate economic theories in microeconomics/industrial organisation and macroeconomics/monetary economics, but a wide scope of other areas within the economics discipline is also covered. Students learn how the economy impacts upon society, and how economic theory can be applied to interpret and analyse economic problems. Students complete their study by writing a thesis to prove their abilities in conducting economic research. The MSc Economics starts twice a year: September and February. Career prospects Economists are employed in many different types of companies, institutions and organizations. Some examples of career opportunities for graduates:

105


Financial institutions: banks, pension funds and insurance companies are important employers of general economists. Examples are: De Nederlandsche Bank (the Netherlands Central Bank), the European Central Bank, commercial banks such as ABN-AMRO, ING and Rabobank, and insurance companies like AEGON. Government: General economists work for all Ministries, in particular for the Ministry for Economic Affairs (including the CPB Netherlands Bureau for Economic Policy Analysis), Ministry of Finance, Ministry of Social Affairs and Employment, and the Ministry for Housing, Regional Development and the Environment. Companies such as Shell, Unilever, Philips and Gasunie. Universities in the Netherlands and abroad. International organizations like the OECD, the IMF, the World bank, the EU, and the European Central Bank. Local authorities such as provinces and municipalities. Institutions for applied research, such as the CBS (Statistics Netherlands), the Algemene Rekenkamer (the Netherlands Court of Audit), TNO, and the Social and Cultural Planning Office. Economists are employed in various areas of work: scientific or policy-orientated research (DNB, CPB, OECD, IMF); policy-making: mainly in large organizations; management: especially in businesses; applied research (NEI, TNO, and research bureaus); education; journalism. D.7.2.

Degree programme

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1 1.1

106

MSc Economics 1 core programme MSc Economics

course title electives MSc Economics A

code

EC 10

C/E lang C EN

electives MSc Economics B

5

C

EN

electives MSc Economics C

10

C

EN

5 5

C C

EN EN

Empirical Methods of Economics Games and Industrial Organization

EBM103A05 EBM104A05


1.1 2.1-2 NB

Macroeconomics for MSc Economics Master’s Thesis Economics

1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1

EN EN

code EBM100A05 EBM102A05 EBM106A05 EBM107A05

EC 5 5 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN E EN E EN


EC 5 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN E EN

code EBM113A05

EC 5

C/E lang E EN

EBM835B05 EBM021A05 EBM095A05 EBM114A05 EBM071A05 EBM097A05 EBM109A05 EBM110A05

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

MSc Economics 1 electives MSc Economics B

course title Economic Growth in History Public Economics and Social Policy Economics of Regulating Markets

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1

C C

MSc Economics 1 electives MSc Economics A

course title Competition Policy - Theory and Practice Empirical Macroeconomics Microeconomics of Household Behaviour Monetary Policy and Financial Regulation


5 20

Students choose 10 ECs from electives MSc Economics A (see list). Students choose 5 ECs from electives MSc Economics B (see list) or from electives MSc Economics A which they have not already taken. Students choose 10 ECs from electives MSc Economics C (see list) and/or courses from electives MSc Econonomics A and B which they have not already taken. If you start the MSc Economics in February please note the following changes: · Empirical Methods of Economics in sem. IIa, · Master’s Thesis Economics in sem. I

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1

EBM836C05 EBM877A20

MSc Economics 1 electives MSc Economics C

course title Dependence & Extremes in Risk Management Econometric Theory and Methods Econometric Inference Growth and Development Policies Models for Short Term Risk Management Responsible Finance and Investing Trade, Environment and Growth Applied Macroeconometrics Applied Microeconometrics

E E E E E E E E

EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN

107


2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 D.7.3.

Asset and Liability Management Economic Geography International Banking and Finance Behavioural Finance & Personal Investing Finance and Development

EBM111A05 EBM094A05 EBM096A05 EBM806B05 EBM069A05

5 5 5 5 5

E E E E E

EN EN EN EN EN



Rules and choices

Rules and choices MSc in Economics Master’s information days November and April/May Entry requirements for the Master’s degree programme

Bachelor’s degree in Economics and Business Economics, or Econometrics and Operations Research and


sufficient command of English. For entry requirements with other bachelor’s degrees, see Section 5 of the MSc OER. 1 September and 1 February Consult the course descriptions in Ocasys. The Master’s programme has been approved, and


108



D.8.

MSc Finance

D.8.1.


Programme Director: Prof. C.L.M. Hermes, [email protected], 050-363 4863 Programme Coordinator: Dr J.H. von Eije, [email protected], 050-363 3685 Secretary: Mrs G. Pol, [email protected], 050-363 3685 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Language: English Objectives and content By choosing the MSc Finance, you will acquire knowledge, understanding and skills required to analyze and evaluate real and complex financial problems of companies and institutions, and to design solutions for these problems. You will gain advanced academic knowledge of finance theory and of research methods in finance and in a selected number of specific sub-fields, such as derivative instruments, corporate finance, corporate valuation, responsible finance and investment, banking and insurance, portfolio theory, institutional investment management, corporate governance, behavioral finance, and finance and development. Within the programme you may concentrate on a number of interesting finance topics. To give some examples: you may study the financing and investment problems of companies and the contribution of corporate governance to company value; you may learn about how to evaluate strategic decisions such as mergers and acquisitions; you may concentrate on the management of investment portfolios and financial risks and/or on the management of banks and insurance companies; and you may study the relationship between finance and development. Within the programme all students have to pass the Research Methods in Finance Course. This is a Master course in quantitative research in finance and it focuses on the knowledge and techniques that are necessary to conduct a research project in finance. As such, it provides a good background for the final research project, i.e. writing a master’s thesis of 20 ECs. Finally, the MSc Finance includes a selection of elective courses. During the programme, you will develop both academic and professional skills. With respect to academic skills, the programme focuses on collecting and analyzing data, planning and designing a research project, and academic writing. Examples of professional skills are computer model building for business decisions, presenting in public, identifying and analyzing problems, and working in teams. The MSc Finance starts twice a year: September and February. Career prospects As a graduate of the MSc Finance you will be trained for positions in which you contribute as a specialist in finance to decision-making in private (multinational) companies and financial institutions, consultancy firms, (international) institutional organizations such as the IMF, World Bank, ECB, etc. and governmental institutions. The curriculum of the programme offers several options to develop a specific labour

109


market orientation. By selecting specific sets of courses, you may develop one of four labour market profiles: 1 Corporate Finance with courses such as: Corporate Finance, Corporate Governance, Corporate Valuation, Responsible Finance and Investing, Banking, Insurance and Risk Management, Business Ethics, and Financial Reporting. 2 Investing with courses such as: Portfolio Theory, Corporate Valuation, Derivative Instruments, Institutional Investment Management, Behavioral Finance and Personal Investing, Responsible Finance and Investing, and Asset and Liability Management. 3 Banking with courses such as: Banking, Insurance & Risk Management, Corporate Finance, Portfolio Theory, Derivative Instruments, Behavioral Finance and Personal Investing, Asset Liability Management,Monetary Policy and Financial Regulation, or International Banking and Finance. 4 Finance and Development with courses such as: Finance and Development, Responsible Finance and Investing, Corporate Governance, Banking, Corporate Valuation, Insurance and Risk Management, Economic Growth and Development, Emerging Markets and/or Trade, Environment & Growth. D.8.2.

Degree programme

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1 2.1-2 NB

course title elective(s) MSc Finance A (see list) elective(s) MSc Finance B (see list) Research Methods in Finance Master’s Thesis Finance

110

EBM070A05 EBM866B20

EC 25

C/E lang C EN

10

C

EN

5 20

C C

EN EN

Students choose 25 ECs from ‘electives MSc Finance A’ (see list). Students choose 10 ECs from ‘electives MSc Finance B’ (see list) and/or ‘electives MSc Finance A’ which they have not already taken. If you start the MSc Finance in February please note the following changes: · Research Methods in Finance in sem. IIa, · Master’s Thesis Finance in sem. I.

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1

code

MSc Finance 1 electives MSc Finance A

course title Corporate Finance for MSc Finance Derivative Instruments

code EBM008B05 EBM068A05

EC 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN


1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2

Corporate Valuation for MSc Finance Portfolio Theory Responsible Finance and Investing Banking, Insurance and Risk Management Institutional Investment Management Behavioural Finance & Personal Investing Corporate Governance for MSc Finance Finance and Development

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1

EBM007C05 EBM015B05 EBM071A05 EBM067A05 EBM822A05 EBM806B05 EBM811C05 EBM069A05

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

code EBM826A05 EBM043A05 EBM092A05 EBM113A05

EC 5 5 5 5

EBM835B05 EBM880A05 EBM853A05 EBM140A05 EBM073A05 EBM112A05 EBM021A05 EBM101A05 EBM820A05 EBM045A05 EBM095A05 EBM090A05 EBM114A05 EBM097A05 EBM109A05 EBM110A05 EBM111A05 EBM083A05 EBM074A05 EBM094A05 EBM096A05 EBM078A05 EBM106A05 EBM107A05 EBM115A05

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

E E E E E E E E


MSc Finance 1 electives MSc Finance B

course title Advanced Industrial Organization Business Ethics Competitiveness of Firms and Nations Dependence & Extremes in Risk Management Econometric Theory and Methods Retail Marketing Stochastic Programming Strategic Marketing for non-Marketing Brand & Product Management Combinatorial Optimization Econometric Inference Economic Growth in History Financial Econometrics Financial Reporting (MSc) Growth and Development Policies International Strategic Alliances Models for Short Term Risk Management Trade, Environment and Growth Applied Macroeconometrics Applied Microeconometrics Asset and Liability Management Comparative Corporate Governance Consumer Psychology Economic Geography International Banking and Finance Marketing Communication Microeconomics of Household Behaviour Monetary Policy and Financial Regulation OR Analysis of Complex Systems

C/E lang E EN E EN E EN E EN E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E

EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN

111


2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 D.8.3.

Supply Chain Optimization Working Capital Management B2B Marketing Capita Selecta EORAS Country Studies Emerging Markets (MSc)

EBM117A05 EBM645A05 EBM808B05 EBM116A05 EBM093A05 EBM085A05

5 5 5 5 5 5

E E E E E E

EN EN EN EN EN EN


See Section F.2.6 and Section F.2.14. D.8.4.

Rules and choices

Rules and choices MSc in Finance Master’s information days

November and April/May

Entry requirements for the Master’s degree programme

Bachelor’s degree in Business Administration (with completed SC Finance!), or Business Economics (with completed SC Finance!), or Economics and Business Economics, or International Business (with completed SC Finance!), or Technology Management (with completed SC Finance!) or completed Pre-MSc Finance programme, and




112



D.9.

MSc Fiscale Economie

D.9.1.


Opleidingsdirecteur: dr. P.P.M. Smid, 050- 363 3668, [email protected] Opleidingscoördinator: mw.mr. M.C. Christen-Schiere, tel. 050-363 3763, [email protected] Studieadvies: Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Taal: Nederlands Doel/inhoud De masteropleiding Fiscale Economie bouwt voort op de bacheloropleiding met dezelfde naam. Het doel van de masteropleiding is het bereiken van een specialistisch, wetenschappelijk niveau op het domein van de fiscale economie. De masteropleiding biedt daarom een verdieping en specialisatie op het gebied van belastingrecht. Tevens biedt de opleiding een verdieping op de gebieden financiering en openbare financiën. In de masteropleiding vindt bovendien integratie plaats van fiscale vakken, zoals bijvoorbeeld bij de onderdelen Onderneming en Belastingheffing c.s. en Particulieren en Belastingheffing. Naast de nationale weten regelgeving wordt nadrukkelijk aandacht besteed aan internationaal en Europees belastingrecht. Er is ruime aandacht voor de fiscale problematiek waarmee multinationals en samenwerkingsverbanden in het MKB, alsmede hun aandeelhouders/eigenaren en werknemers worden geconfronteerd. In de opleiding wordt veelvuldig met casusposities gewerkt. Via die casusposities wordt op geïntegreerde wijze diepgaande en specialistische kennis van de vakgebieden aangeboden en wordt van studenten gevraagd kritisch naar oplossingen te zoeken op deze complexe fiscaal economische vraagstukken. De afstudeeropdracht is meer dan de bachelorafstudeeropdracht gericht op conceptueel onderzoek, waarin een brede afweging wordt gemaakt van theorieën en methoden van onderzoek, uitgaande van een bepaalde vraagstelling. In de meeste gevallen wordt de afstudeeropdracht begeleid vanuit de Faculteit Rechtsgeleerdheid, de tweede beoordelaar is afkomstig van FEB. Het instroommoment is 1 september. Later instromen is mogelijk, maar niet goed studeerbaar in verband met de opbouw van het programma. Carrièreperspectieven De opleiding sluit uitstekend aan op de eisen van de beroepspraktijk. In zijn algemeenheid kan worden gesteld dat fiscaal economen die tevens de masteropleiding Fiscale Economie hebben afgerond, voornamelijk functies vervullen bij belastingadviesbureaus, accountantskantoren, de belastingdienst en fiscale afdelingen van ondernemingen (multinationals en MKB; en niet alleen in Nederland maar ook in het buitenland). Voorts vinden fiscaal economen hun werkkring bij het Ministerie van Financiën, bij de Europese Unie en bij internationale organisaties zoals de OECD, waar meer algemene taken met betrekking tot belastingwetgeving of belastingheffing worden vervuld. Enkelen vinden hun werkkring in het onderwijs of bij de universiteit. Met een masterdiploma hebben afgestudeerden toegang tot

113


posities op een hoger niveau dan afgestudeerde bachelors. Binnen de belastingdienst gaat het dan om meer beleidsbepalende functies en functies op het hogere controleniveau. Bij de belastingadvieskantoren gaat het eveneens om meer beleidsbepalende functies en functies op hoger adviesniveau. Vanuit dit soort ondernemingen wordt door afgestudeerde masterstudenten vaak nog een aanvullende opleiding gevolgd, bijvoorbeeld bij de Nederlandse Orde van Belastingadviseurs (NOB) of het College van Belastingadviseurs (CB). D.9.2.


V = Verplicht; K = Keuze; KG = Keuzegroep; EN = onderwijs wordt in het Engels gegeven; NL = onderwijs wordt in het Nederlands gegeven; zie ook de vakbeschrijvingen in Ocasys. Opleiding: Studiejaar: sem 1.1-2 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.1 D.9.3.

MSc Fiscale Economie 1

vaknaam Onderneming en Belastingheffing C.S. Particulieren en Belastingheffing c.s. Public Choice voor FE Tax Accounting Financiering III A&C/FE Masterafstudeerwerkstuk Fiscale Economie Internationaal & Europees Belastingrecht Law and Economics voor FE

vakcode RGMFI00107 RGMFI00106 EBM841B05 EBM861B06 EBM864B05 EBM875A20 RGMFI00306 EBM105B05

EC V/K taal 7 V NL 6 V NL 5 V NL 6 V NL 5 V NL 20 V NL 6 V NL 5 V NL

Regels en keuzes

Regels en keuzes MSc Fiscale Economie Mastervoorlichting November en april/mei Toelatingseis master

Instroommoment master Ingangseisen mastervakken Ingangseisen masterafstudeerwerkstuk


114

BSc Fiscale Economie, of BSc Fiscaal Recht (met aanvullende eisen, meer info bij de programmacoördinator en/of studieadviseur) 1 september (later mogelijk, maar niet goed studeerbaar i.v.m. opbouw studieprogramma). Zie de vakbeschrijvingen in Ocasys. het masterprogramma is goedgekeurd en 20 EC van het masterprogramma (inclusief vrijstellingen) is behaald. Aanvragen via Progress, uiterlijk 6 weken vóór de start van het masterafstudeerwerkstuk. Zie ook de informatie op FEB-infonet.


D.10.

MSc Human Resource Management

D.10.1.


Programme Director: Prof. O. Janssen, [email protected], 050-363 7199 Secretary: Mrs C.R. Teuben, [email protected], and Mrs H.I. Meijer, [email protected], 050-363 4288 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Language: English Objective/content Graduates of the Master of Science in Human Resource Management (HRM) will be able to define, analyze, and evaluate problems and issues related to the management of work and employment of people in organizations. You acquire rigorous academic analytical and scientific skills to consider and explore how HRM policies and practices can be developed and applied to ensure the availability, employability, commitment, and vitality of employees needed to accomplish organizational goals. The main courses are Strategic Human Resource Management, Leadership, Work Design & Team Processes, Research & Professional Skills for HRM, Labour Law, and Personnel Instruments. The focus of the courses is on understanding and applying theories and principles that research has shown to advance the management of work and employment of people in organizations. You learn how HRM policies and practices can be established on the best available research-based evidence that has been obtained and established in social and business sciences. You practice adopting this research-based approach when you conduct your own research projects during the programme. To complete your MSc HRM, you write a master thesis, which may be combined with an internship within an organization. The MSc Human Resource Management starts twice a year: September and February. Career prospects Graduates are highly employable and find a broad variety of jobs in HRM-related domains in all kinds of companies and organizations. Some examples of positions are: junior human resource manager, recruitment and selection officer, training and development officer, personnel consultant, organizational advisor, or policy officer for personnel affairs. If you want to continue your career in the academic field, you can look for a PhD position at FEB or other universities around the world. D.10.2.

Degree programme


115


Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.2 1.1 1.1 NB

course title electives MSc HRM (see list)

code

EC 10

Strategic HRM Leadership Research & Professional Skills for HRM Master’s Thesis HRM Work Design and Team Processes Personnel Instruments HRM & International Labour Law or HRM & Nederlands arbeidsrecht

EBM011A05 EBM072A05 EBM009B05 EBM722B20 EBM012A05 EBM014A05 EBM733A05 EBM016A05

5 C 5 C 5 C 20 C 5 C 5 C 5 EG A 5 EG A

C/E C

lang EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN NL

Students choose 5 ECs from option group A. Students choose 10 ECs from ‘electives MSc HRM’ (see list). They also may choose the course from option group A they have not already taken. If you start the MSc HRM in February please note the following changes: · Research & Professional Skills for HRM in sem. 2.2, · Master’s Thesis HRM in sem. I

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 D.10.3.

MSc Human Resource Management/HRM 1 electives MSc HRM

course title Business Ethics Organization Design (MSc) Business Process Innovation and Change Personnel Economics Conflict Man. & Industrial Relations Innovation in Healthcare Organizations Behavioural Perspectives on Corp. Gov. Innovation & Entrepreneurship Service Operations Substitution and/or transition regulations

See Section F.2.15.

116

MSc Human Resource Management/HRM 1 core programme MSc HRM

code EBM043A05 EBM049A05 EBM044A05 EBM678A05 EBM673A05 EBM047A05 EBM023A05 EBM621A05 EBM634A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN


D.10.4.

Rules and choices

Rules and choices MSc in Human Resource Management Master’s information days November and April/May Entry requirements for the Master’s degree programme

Bachelor’s degree in Business Administration, or Business Economics, or Economics and Business Economics, or International Business, or Technology Management or completed Pre-MSc HRM programme, and





117


D.11.

MSc International Business and Management

D.11.1.


Programme Director: Prof. S. Brakman, [email protected], 050-363 3746 Programme Coordinator: H.A. Ritsema, [email protected], 050-363 3844 Information: Mrs R. van Est, [email protected], 050-363 6692 Secretary: GEM, [email protected], 050-363 3458 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Language: English Objectives and content The MSc International Business and Management degree programme focuses on the business and management aspects related to a multinational enterprise. As a graduate you have advanced academic knowledge and understanding of management and leadership issues within multinational companies, international business strategy and comparative institutional approaches. You have specific research skills that are crucial to management’s ability to analyse new environments and pertinent developments and the necessary social communication skills to operate in an international context. The programme starts with two compulsory courses in the fields of International Business Strategy and FDI & Trade. In addition you select three core electives in such areas as Institutional Analysis, International Strategic Alliances, Finance, etc. and two electives. All core electives have an international and/or comparative approach. By selecting electives in a specific way, you can pursue your own interests. Moreover, you take part in a Research Seminar with the objective of acquiring the specific research skills that are crucial to management’s ability to analyse new environments and pertinent developments and to prepare you for writing the Master’s Thesis that is written to complete your MSc. The MSc International Business and Management starts twice a year: September and February. Double Degree programmes IB&M offers the following Double Degree programmes: with the Newcastle University Business School, Newcastle: Advanced International Business Management & Marketing (AIBM&M:) MSc in International Business and Management (University of Groningen) and MA in Advanced International Business Management (Newcastle University Business School); and with the Fudan University,Shanghai: China and the World Economy: MSc in International Business and Management (University of Groningen) and MA in Applied Economics (Fudan University, Shanghai). The IB&M Double Degree programmes have one entry date: September. For further information see section E.7 and E.10.

118


Career Prospects The MSc International Business and Management degree programme is focused on the business and management aspects related to the multinational enterprise. As a graduate you will have advanced academic knowledge and understanding of management and leadership issues within multinational companies, international business strategy and comparative institutional approaches. You will have specific research skills that are crucial to management’s ability to analyse new environments and pertinent developments and the necessary social communication skills to operate in an international context. Upon completion of the programme, you as a graduate can take up positions in (multinational) corporations and (international) governmental organizations. Alternatively, you might opt for an academic career as PhD researcher. D.11.2.

Degree programme

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 2.1-2 NB

MSc International Business & Management/IB&M 1 core programme MSc IB&M

course title elective(s) MSc IB&M A (see list)

code

elective(s) MSc IB&M B (see list) Foreign Dir. Investment & Trade (MSc) International Business Strategy (MSc) Research Seminar for IB&M Master’s Thesis IB&M

EBM086A05 EBM088A05 EBM718B05 EBM719A20

EC 15

C/E lang C EN

10

C

EN

5 5 5 20

C C C C

EN EN EN EN

Students choose 15 ECs from ‘electives MSc IB&M A’ (see list). Students choose 10 ECs from ‘electives MSc IB&M B’ (see list), and/or courses from ‘electives MSc IB&M A’ (see list) which they have not already taken. If you start the MSc IB&M in February please note the following changes: · Foreign Dir. Investment & Trade (MSc) in sem. IIa, · International Business Strategy (MSc) in sem. IIa, · Research Seminar for IB&M in sem. IIb, · Master’s Thesis IB&M in sem. I.

119


Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.2

course title Comparative Institutional Anal. for IB&M International Bank Management International Strategic Alliances Comparative Corporate Governance International Entrepreneurship Emerging Markets (MSc)

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2

120

MSc International Business & Management/IB&M 1 electives MSc IB&M A code EBM084A05 EBM087A05 EBM090A05 EBM083A05 EBM089A05 EBM085A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN

MSc International Business & Management/IB&M 1 electives MSc IB&M B

course title Business Ethics Competitiveness of Firms and Nations Developing for Markets HRM & International Labour Law Organization Design (MSc) Retail Marketing Strategic Marketing for non-Marketing Brand & Product Management Business Process Innovation and Change Economic Growth in History Growth and Development Policies Healthcare Operations Managerial Decision Making and Control Operations Management in Proc. Industry Personnel Economics Responsible Finance and Investing Strategic Management & Technology Trade, Environment and Growth Conflict Man. & Industrial Relations Consumer Psychology Economic Geography International Banking and Finance Marketing Communication Monetary Policy and Financial Regulation Process Improvement & Quality Control Purchasing B2B Marketing

code EBM043A05 EBM092A05 EBM062A05 EBM733A05 EBM049A05 EBM880A05 EBM140A05 EBM073A05 EBM044A05 EBM101A05 EBM095A05 EBM034A05 EBM027A05 EBM725C05 EBM678A05 EBM071A05 EBM051A05 EBM097A05 EBM673A05 EBM074A05 EBM094A05 EBM096A05 EBM078A05 EBM107A05 EBM036A05 EBM037A05 EBM808B05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN


2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 D.11.3.

Country Studies Finance and Development Franchising Innovation & Entrepreneurship Service Operations

EBM093A05 EBM069A05 EBM046A05 EBM621A05 EBM634A05

5 5 5 5 5

E E E E E

EN EN EN EN EN



Rules and choices

Rules and choices MSc in International Business and Management Master’s information days November and April/May Entry requirements for the Master’s degree programme

Bachelor’s degree in Business Administration, or Business Economics, or Econometrics and Operations Research, or Economics and Business Economics, or International Business, or Technology Management or completed Pre-MSc IB&M programme, and

Starting dates for the Master’s degree programme Entry requirements for Master’s courses MSc IB&M courses

sufficient command of English. For entry requirements with other bachelor’s degrees, see Section 5 of the MSc OER. 1 September and 1 February The double degree programmes only start in September. Consult the course descriptions in Ocasys. The courses offered in semester 1 are different from the courses offered in semester 2. Compulsory courses are offered in both semesters, (core) electives are offered once a year. Besides compulsory courses students choose electives and core electives. Students who take part in a double degree programme must obey specific rules with respect to the course selection.

121



The Master’s programme has been approved, and

Master’s Thesis starting dates


122

at least 20 ECs from the Master’s programme have been obtained (including the ‘Research Seminar for IB&M’ course). Students can start with their Master’s Thesis and the related ‘Research Seminar for IB&M’ course twice a year. Apply via Progress, no later than 6 weeks before starting the Master’s Thesis. See the information on the FEB infonet.


D.12.

MSc International Economics and Business

D.12.1.


Programme Director: Prof. S. Brakman, [email protected], 050-363 3746 Programme coordinator: Dr. E.H. van Leeuwen, [email protected], 050-363 3744 Secretary: Secretariat Global Economics and Management, [email protected], 050-363 3458 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Language: English Objectives and content The MSc programme in International Economics and Business (IE&B) aims to train you in (strategic) decision-making in national and international corporations and public organizations, such as financial institutions, consultancy firms, government agencies and the like. In doing so, the MSc IE&B has a strong focus on one integrative topic, i.e. Multinational Enterprises in relation to the World Economy. You acquire the very latest knowledge on international trade, economic geography, innovation theory, international business strategy, with (generalized) transaction cost theory, international economics, the theory of business systems and comparative institutional theory as the main analytical building blocks. Furthermore, you as a MSc graduate are able to apply this knowledge in different settings and interpret the interrelationship between the knowledge areas. By analysing (applied) research questions in the field of international economics, comparative institutional analysis and international business strategy, you take the first steps towards research and the analysis of relatively complex problems in the field. The programme starts with two compulsory courses in the fields of International Business Strategy and FDI & Trade. In addition you select three core electives, which all have an international and/or comparative approach, and two other electives. Moreover, you take part in a Research Seminar which prepares you for writing the Master’s Thesis. By selecting your electives in a specific way you can pursue your own interests. For example, if you are primarily interested in problems of growth and development, you can choose courses like Growth and Development Policies, Economic Geography, and Trade, Environment and Growth. If your interest is primarily in financial institutions you can choose International Banking and Finance and Comparative Corporate Governance. The MSc International Economics and Business starts twice a year: September and February.

123


Double degree programmes IE&B offers the following Double Degree programmes : with the Georg-August-Universität Göttingen: MSc in International Economics and Business (IE&B, RUG) and MA in International Economics (Georg-August-Universität Göttingen); with the Corvinus University Budapest: MSc in International Economics and Business (IE&B, RUG) and MA in International Economy and Business (Corvinus University Budapest); and with the Fudan University Shanghai: China and the World Economy: MSc in International Economics and Business (IE&B, RUG) and MA in Applied Economics (Fudan). The IE&B Double Degree programmes have one entry date: September. For further information see sections E8, E.9 and E10. Career prospects As a graduate of the MSc IE&B you will be able to take up positions in internationally oriented firms (banks, multinationals), international organizations (World Bank, IMF, EU), and internationally oriented departments of government agencies. The programme is focused on developing the kind of skills and abilities needed by those who work as professional economists and economic advisers. Next to a solid understanding of business strategy, international economics and quantitative research methods, the ongoing globalisation of economic policy and business strategy does require a MSc graduate to have distinct professional capabilities. The diversity of international organizations requires the ability to function in international and multicultural teams so as to add value to the organization. The MSc IE&B offers a consistent international setting both in terms of content and organizations at high level. Occasionally, graduates are selected to participate in high level contract research activities of international organizations, such as the Conference Board (New York) and the International Labour Organization (ILO, Geneva). Professionals from international organizations are actively invited to provide guest lectures, and some members of the academic staff have strong relationships with international research and consultancy institutes or policy advice centers (such as the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD), World Bank, The Conference Board, CESifo institute Munich, the Social and Economic Council of the Netherlands, The Netherlands’ Bureau for Economic Policy Analysis (CPB), and Towers Watson Netherlands). D.12.2.

Degree programme


124


Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 2.1-2 NB

course title elective(s) MSc IE&B A (see list)

Foreign Dir. Investment & Trade (MSc) International Business Strategy (MSc) Research Seminar for IE&B Master’s Thesis IE&B

1.1 1.1

EBM086A05 EBM088A05 EBM846B05 EBM868A20

EC 15

C/E lang C EN

10

C

EN

5 5 5 20

C C C C

EN EN AR EN

Students choose 15 ECs from ‘electives MSc IE&B A’ (see list). Students choose 10 ECs from ‘electives MSc IE&B B’ (see list), and/or courses from ‘electives MSc IE&B A’ (see list) which they have not already taken. If you start the MSc IE&B in February please note the following changes: · Foreign Dir. Investment & Trade (MSc) in sem. IIa, · International Business Strategy (MSc) in sem. IIa, · Research Seminar for IE&B in sem. IIb, · Master’s Thesis IE&B in sem. I.

MSc International Economics & Business/IE&B 1 electives MSc IE&B A

course title Competitiveness of Firms and Nations Growth and Development Policies Trade, Environment and Growth Economic Geography International Banking and Finance Country Studies


code

elective(s) MSc IE&B B (see list)


MSc International Economics & Business/IE&B 1 core programme MSc IE&B


EC 5 5 5 5 5 5


MSc International Economics & Business/IE&B 1 electives MSc IE&B B

course title Business Ethics Comparative Institutional Anal. for IB&M Dependence & Extremes in Risk Management Developing for Markets HRM & International Labour Law


EC 5 5 5

EBM062A05 EBM733A05

5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN E EN E E

EN EN

125


1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 D.12.3.

Strategic Marketing for non-Marketing Brand & Product Management Economic Growth in History International Bank Management International Risk Management International Strategic Alliances Managerial Decision Making and Control Responsible Finance and Investing Strategic Management & Technology Comparative Corporate Governance Conflict Man. & Industrial Relations International Entrepreneurship Monetary Policy and Financial Regulation Behavioural Finance & Personal Investing Emerging Markets (MSc) Finance and Development Innovation & Entrepreneurship

EBM140A05 EBM073A05 EBM101A05 EBM087A05 EBM099A05 EBM090A05 EBM027A05 EBM071A05 EBM051A05 EBM083A05 EBM673A05 EBM089A05 EBM107A05 EBM806B05 EBM085A05 EBM069A05 EBM621A05

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E

EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN



Rules and choices

Rules and choices MSc in International Economics and Business Master’s information days November and April/May Entry requirements for the Master’s degree programme

Bachelor’s degree in Business Administration, or Business Economics, or Econometrics and Operations Research, or Economics and Business Economics, or International Business, or Technology Management or completed Pre-MSc IE&B programme, and


126

sufficient command of English. For entry requirements with other bachelor’s degrees, see Section 5 of the MSc OER. 1 September and 1 February The double debree programmes only start in September. Consult the course descriptions in Ocasys.


MSc IE&B courses



The courses offered in semester 1 are different from the courses offered in semester 2. Compulsory courses are offered in both semesters, (core) electives are offered once a year. Besides compulsory courses students choose electives and core electives. Students who take part in a double degree programme must obey specific rules with respect to the course selection. The Master’s programme has been approved, and at least 20 ECs from the Master’s programme have been obtained. Apply via Progress, no later than 6 weeks before starting the Master’s Thesis. See the information on the FEB infonet.

127


D.13.

MSc International Financial Management

D.13.1.


Director: Prof. C.L.M. Hermes, [email protected], 050-363 4863 Coordinator: Dr W. Westerman, [email protected], 050-363 37088 Secretary: Mrs E.T.Jelsema, [email protected]. 050-3633685 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Language: English Objectives and content The aim of the MSc degree programme in International Financial Management is to equip you with knowledge, understanding and skills required to define, analyze and evaluate real and complex international financial management problems on both a societal level as well as on the level of companies and institutions, and to design solutions for these problems. You will have advanced academic knowledge of theoretical concepts in (international) financial management and you will be able to apply research methods, to analyze and to solve financial problems multinational companies are faced with. Moreover, you will have advanced knowledge in a selected number of specific sub-fields in international financial management, such as international corporate finance, international risk management, and international management accounting and control. In addition, you will also acquire advanced knowledge of different aspects of international business and the international economic environment in which multinational companies operate. Finally, you will have the opportunity to broaden the scope of your studies by selecting two electives from a list of other MSc programmes, e.g. Economics, Econometrics, Finance, International Economics and Business Administration (specialization organization, management and control). As part of the programme the Research Methods in Finance course is offered, which is compulsory for all students in International Financial Management. It is a Master course in quantitative research in finance and focuses on the knowledge and techniques that are necessary to conduct a research project in international financial management issues. As such, it provides a good background to the final research project, i.e. writing a master’s thesis of 20 ECs. During the programme, you will develop both academic and professional skills. With respect to academic skills, the programme focuses on collecting and analyzing data, planning and designing a research project, and academic writing. Examples of professional skills are computer model building for business decisions, presenting in public, identifying and analyzing problems, and working in teams. The MSc degree programme International Financial Management is offered in two variants: A one-year programme in Groningen, leading to the MSc International Financial Management.

128


An 18 month double degree programme, together with Uppsala University, leading to the MSc International Financial Management (RUG) and the MSc in Business and Economics (Uppsala University). At Uppsala University you will extend your studies in International Financial Management by one additional semester (30 ECs), attending four courses within the field. For further information see section E.11. The MSc International Financial Management starts twice a year: September and February. Career prospects After successful completion of the MSc programme International Financial Management, you will be able to take up positions in which you contribute as a specialist in international financial management to decision-making in multinational companies and financial institutions, consultancy firms, multinational public organizations such as the IMF, World Bank, ECB, etc. and governmental institutions. D.13.2.

Degree programme

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 NB

MSc International Financial Management/IFM 1 core programme MSc IFM

course title elective(s) MSc IFM (see list)

code

EC 10

International Business Strategy (MSc) International Man. Accounting & Control Research Methods in Finance Financial Reporting (MSc) International Corporate Finance International Risk Management Master’s Thesis IFM

EBM088A05 EBM662A05 EBM070A05 EBM045A05 EBM098A05 EBM099A05 EBM022A20

5 5 5 5 5 5 20

C/E lang C EN C C C C C C C


Students choose 10 ECs from ‘electives MSc IFM’ (see list). If you start the MSc IFM in February please note the following changes: · International Business Strategy (MSc) in sem. IIa, · Research Methods in Finance in sem. IIa, · Financial Reporting (MSc) in sem. IIb, · International Corporate Finance in sem. IIb, · Master’s Thesis IFM in sem. I.

129


Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 D.13.3.

MSc International Financial Management/IFM 1 electives MSc IFM

course title Business Ethics Competitiveness of Firms and Nations Dependence & Extremes in Risk Management IT Governance Organization Design (MSc) Business Process Innovation and Change Economic Growth in History Growth and Development Policies International Strategic Alliances Responsible Finance and Investing Strategic Management & Technology Trade, Environment and Growth Comparative Corporate Governance Economic Geography International Banking and Finance Microeconomics of Household Behaviour Monetary Policy and Financial Regulation Working Capital Management Behavioural Finance & Personal Investing Country Studies Emerging Markets (MSc) Finance and Development Franchising Substitutions and/or transition regulations

See Section F.2.17 and Section F.2.19.

130


EC 5 5 5

EBM048A05 EBM049A05 EBM044A05 EBM101A05 EBM095A05 EBM090A05 EBM071A05 EBM051A05 EBM097A05 EBM083A05 EBM094A05 EBM096A05 EBM106A05 EBM107A05 EBM645A05 EBM806B05 EBM093A05 EBM085A05 EBM069A05 EBM046A05

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN E EN E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E

EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN


D.13.4.

Rules and choices

Rules and choices MSc in International Financial Management (IFM) Master’s information days November and May Entry requirements for the Master’s degree programme

Bachelor’s degree in Business Administration, or Business Economics, or Economics and Business Economics, or International Business, or Technology Management or completed Pre-MSc IFM programme, and


sufficient command of English. For entry requirements with other bachelor’s degrees, see Section 5 of the MSc OER. 1 September and 1 February Consult the course descriptions in Ocasys. The Master’s programme has been approved and


at least 20 ECs from the Master’s programme have been obtained (including the ‘Research Methods in Finance’ course). Apply via Progress, no later than 6 weeks before starting the Master’s Thesis. See the information on the FEB infonet.

131


D.14.

MSc Marketing

D.14.1.


Programme Director: Prof. P.C. Verhoef, [email protected], 050-363 7320 Programme Coordinator: Dr J.A. Voerman, [email protected], 050-363 7069 Secretary: Mrs H.G. Tamling, [email protected], 050-363 7065 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Language: English Content Marketing is about building relations between an organization and its customers. These organizations can be operating in the field of services or goods, profit or nonprofit, business-to-consumers or business-to-business. Understanding customers, building a strong brand & reputation and performing all sorts of activities to stimulate customer satisfaction and sales are important parts of marketing. To be able to understand the customers, customer insights are needed, placing a strong emphasis on marketing intelligence and research. Furthermore, insights in the underlying psychological processes in consumer-decision-making are important. An example of a strong brand is Coca Cola, with its unique distribution network stretching from the beach in Florida to tiny villages in the Himalayas (Place). Coca Cola regularly introduces new tastes (Product), it has a large communication budget spent on, for example TV advertising and sponsoring (Promotion), and can ask premium prices (Price). Although in blind tastes Coca Cola has about the same preference among customers as Pepsi, its market share is much larger due to better marketing. Another example is Tesco, a leading UK retailer. They use the information obtained from their loyalty cards for understanding and satisfying customers needs. In this Master, the most recent developments in the area of marketing are dealt with. In the courses, recent theory as well as practice hold a central position in both lectures and assignments. The vision of the Groningen Department of Marketing is that a good and in-depth knowledge of the customer provides the best possibilities of creating a sustainable competitive advantage. Collecting qualitative and quantitative data about customers and analyzing these with appropriate research methods is the starting point for finding creative ways of targeting and managing these customers. This is translated into the two tracks that are offered within our marketing programme: the track marketing management and the track marketing intelligence. Also, each course is research-driven and fact-based. In each track, you have to attend the three core courses (i.e. Strategic Marketing, Marketing Research Methods, and Consumer Psychology), and write a thesis. The other 25 ECs are taken up with marketing management or marketing intelligence courses. Within the Marketing Management track, there is also a possibility to take some electives from other departments.

132


The Department of Marketing is known for its outstanding performance in marketing science (top ratings on all criteria) and has contacts with many foreign universities and Professors. Next, practitioners are invited to give guest lectures which relate theory to real business-life. In addition, most marketing students write their thesis in combination with a project for an organization, applying theory to a real marketing problem. The MSc Marketing starts twice a year: September and February. Double degree programme Marketing offers the following Double Degree programme with the BI Norwegian Business School (Oslo): MSc in Marketing, profile Marketing Intelligence (BS-Marketing, RUG) and MSc in Strategic Marketing Management (BI, Oslo). The Marketing Double Degree programme has one entry date: September. For further information see section E.12. Career prospects Marketing Management Marketing manager; Product or brand manager; Segment or account manager; Customer relations manager; Marketing strategy consultant; Direct marketing manager; E-commerce manager; and Category manager. Marketing Intelligence Market researcher in research and consultancy companies; Market researcher within an organization; Market intelligence expert or database analyst; Customer intelligence expert; and Researcher at a university (Research Master and PhD programme). D.14.2.

Degree programme


133


Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1 1.1 2.1-2 2.1 NB

course title elective(s) MSc Mark. Int. A (see list)

Marketing Research Methods Strategic Marketing for MSc Marketing Master’s Thesis Marketing Consumer Psychology

EBM080A05 EBM081B05 EBM867B20 EBM074A05

EC 15

C/E lang C EN

10

C

EN

5 5 20 5

C C C C

EN EN EN EN

Students choose 15 ECs from ‘electives MSc Marketing Intelligence A’ (see list). Students choose 10 ECs from ‘electives MSc Marketing Intelligence B’ (see list). As an alternative to selecting courses from ‘electives MSc Marketing Intelligence B’ students may also choose courses from ‘electives MSc Marketing Intelligence A’ which they have not already taken. If you start the MSc Marketing Intelligence in February please note the following changes: · Marketing Research Methods in sem. IIa, · Master’s Thesis Marketing in semester I.

sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1 1.1 2.1-2 2.1

134

code

elective(s) MSc Mark. Int. B (see list)


NB

MSc Marketing 1 core programme Marketing Intelligence

MSc Marketing 1 core programme Marketing Management

course title elective(s) MSc Mark. Man. A (see list)

code

elective(s) MSc Mark. Man. B (see list) Marketing Research Methods Strategic Marketing for MSc Marketing Master’s Thesis Marketing Consumer Psychology


EC 15

C/E lang C EN

10

C

EN

5 5 20 5

C C C C

EN EN EN EN

Students choose 15 ECs from ‘electives MSc Marketing Management A’ (see list). Students choose 10 ECs from ‘electives MSc Marketing Management B’ (see list). As an alternative to selecting courses from ‘electives MSc Marketing Management B’ students may also choose courses from ‘electives MSc Marketing Management A’ which they have not already taken. If you start the MSc Marketing Management in February please note the following changes: · Marketing Research Methods in sem. IIa, · Master’s Thesis Marketing in sem. I.



course title Marketing Engineering Marketing Research Practice Market Models Customer Models

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2

code EBM079A05 EBM881B05 EBM077A05 EBM076A05

EC 5 5 5 5


EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN

EC 5 5 5 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN

MSc Marketing 1 electives Marketing Intelligence B

course title Business Ethics Competitiveness of Firms and Nations Econometric Theory and Methods Organization Design (MSc) Retail Marketing Brand & Product Management Customer Management Healthcare Operations Marketing Communication Supply Chain Dynamics B2B Marketing Emerging Markets (MSc) Franchising Service Operations


MSc Marketing 1 electives Marketing Intelligence A

code EBM043A05 EBM092A05 EBM835B05 EBM049A05 EBM880A05 EBM073A05 EBM075A05 EBM034A05 EBM078A05 EBM147A05 EBM808B05 EBM085A05 EBM046A05 EBM634A05

MSc Marketing 1 electives Marketing Management A

course title Retail Marketing Brand & Product Management Customer Management Marketing Communication B2B Marketing

code EBM880A05 EBM073A05 EBM075A05 EBM078A05 EBM808B05

135


Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 D.14.3.

MSc Marketing 1 electives Marketing Management B

course title Business Ethics Competitiveness of Firms and Nations Developing for Markets Econometric Theory and Methods Organization Design (MSc) Business Process Innovation and Change Financial Reporting (MSc) Healthcare Operations International Strategic Alliances Marketing Engineering Marketing Research Practice Market Models Applied Macroeconometrics Conflict Man. & Industrial Relations Microeconomics of Household Behaviour Purchasing Supply Chain Dynamics Behavioural Perspectives on Corp. Gov. Customer Models Emerging Markets (MSc) Franchising Innovation & Entrepreneurship Service Operations Substitution and/or transition regulations

See Sections F.2.7 and F.2.20.

136

code EBM043A05 EBM092A05 EBM062A05 EBM835B05 EBM049A05 EBM044A05 EBM045A05 EBM034A05 EBM090A05 EBM079A05 EBM881B05 EBM077A05 EBM109A05 EBM673A05 EBM106A05 EBM037A05 EBM147A05 EBM023A05 EBM076A05 EBM085A05 EBM046A05 EBM621A05 EBM634A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN


D.14.4.

Rules and choices

Rules and choices MSc in Marketing Master’s information days November and April/May Entry requirements for the Master’s degree programme

Bachelor’s degree in Business Administration, or Business Economics, or Econometrics and Operations Research, or Economics and Business Economics, or International Business Technology Management or completed Pre-MSc Marketing programme, and




at least 20 ECs from the Master’s programme have been obtained (including the ‘Marketing Research Methods’ course). Apply via Progress, no later than 6 weeks before starting the Master’s Thesis. See the information on the FEB infonet.

137


D.15.

MSc Supply Chain Management

D.15.1.


Programme Director: Mrs Prof. I.F.A. Vis, [email protected], 050-363 7364 Programme Coordinator: Dr H. Broekhuis, [email protected], 050-363 7288 Secretary: Mrs N. van de Beek, [email protected], 050-363 3921 Information: http://www.rug.nl/masters/supply-chain-management Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Language: English Objectives and content The aim of the Master Supply Chain Management is to educate students with respect to the design and coordination of supply chains and to planning and controlling logistics operations in order to deliver high quality products and services in a fast, efficient, and resilient way. A supply chain can be seen as a network of organisations working together to carry out customer orders. Supply chain managers contribute to this process by managing the whole supply chain and all operations included that are related to flows of materials, information and services. Logistics has become an important tool in planning and controlling these flows. Effective supply chain management and logistics can provide a competitive advantage. Technology and ICT innovations, sustainability issues and market trends, such as increased internet sales, require changes in the management of supply chains. A student in the academic Master Supply Chain Management will focus on the design, co-ordination of supply chains and planning and control of supply chain operations and will learn how to deal with relevant trends. Core aspects include supply chain strategies, logistics, network design, planning and control of operations in production, distribution and service environments, co-ordination and cooperation strategies, and quality management and control. Graduates of this master programme are able to define, diagnose and analyse supply chain decision problems and propose and evaluate effective solutions and strategies. With a mixture of rigorous academic learning and practical application, graduates can develop supply chain theories, models, methods and best practices to increase supply chain quality, flexibility, and reliability and to increase delivery speed and efficiency in the order fulfilment process. Graduates will be able to communicate results both orally and in writing to an audience of researchers and managers. The MSc Supply Chain Management starts twice a year: September and February. Career prospects In this master you will be prepared for a career as a supply chain manager of an (international) organization, a logistics or quality manager in a production, distribution or service environment or as a consultant in the supply chain management practice. Alternatively, you might opt for an academic career and start as a PhD researcher.

138


D.15.2.

Degree programme

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 1.2 2.1 NB

course title elective(s) MSc SCM (see list)

code

EC 10

Logistics and Supply Chain Operations Service Operations Supply Chain Network Design Research Methods for SCM Master’s Thesis SCM Process Improvement & Quality Control Strategic Supply Chain Management or Purchasing

EBM035A05 EBM634A05 EBM040A05 EBM038A05 EBM720B20 EBM036A05 EBM039A05 EBM037A05

5 C 5 C 5 C 5 C 20 C 5 C 5 EG A 5 EG A

C/E C

lang EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN

Students choose 5 ECs from option group A. Students choose 10 ECs from ‘electives MSc SCM’ (see list). They also may choose the course from option group A they have not already taken. If you start the MSc SCM in February please note the following changes: · Research Methods for SCM in sem. IIb, · Service Operations in sem. IIb, · Master’s Thesis SCM in sem. I. · ·

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2

MSc Supply Chain Management/SCM 1 core programme MSc SCM

MSc Supply Chain Management/SCM 1 electives MSc SCM

course title Behavioural Operations Management Business Process Innovation and Change Healthcare Operations Operations Management in Proc. Industry Innovation in Healthcare Organizations Inventory Management Supply Chain Dynamics Innovation & Entrepreneurship

code EBM032A05 EBM044A05 EBM034A05 EBM725C05 EBM047A05 EBM026A05 EBM147A05 EBM621A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN

139


D.15.3.


See Section F.2.9 and Section F.2.21. D.15.4.

Rules and choices

Rules and choices MSc in Supply Chain Management Master’s information days November and April/May Entry requirements for the Master’s degree programme

Bachelor’s degree in Business Administration, or Business Economics, or Econometrics and Operations Research, or Economics and Business Economics, or International Business, or Technology Management, or Industrial Engineering and Management or completed Pre-MSc SCM programme, and




140

at least 20 ECs from the Master’s programme have been obtained. Apply via Progress, no later than 6 weeks before starting the Master’s Thesis. See the information on the FEB infonet.


D.16.


D.16.1.


Programme Director: Mrs Prof. I.F.A. Vis, 050 363 7364, [email protected] Programme Coordinator: Dr J.A.C. Bokhorst, 050-363 4693, [email protected] Secretary: Mrs N. van de Beek, 050 363 3921, [email protected] Information: http://www.rug.nl/masters/technology-and-operations-management/ Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Language: English Objective/Content The MSc Technology and Operations Management focuses on operations management aspects during the entire life cycle of products and services and on the introduction of technological innovations in organisations. Within the product life cycle, product design is the first step involved in putting a product in the market. The next step is production and making the product ready for supply to customers. Here, distribution networks and facilities are used to deliver products to consumers. The final step is the support given to the customer while the product is in use by the customer. This aftermarket service includes warranty, parts and repair service, and product replacement. Operations management aspects, in all phases, need to be organised in an efficient way to ensure high levels of customers' satisfaction and costs efficiency. Technology management enables organisations to create a competitive advantage. The main programme includes the courses operations management and control, operations modelling and simulation, behavioural operations management, asset management, and either product and service development or facility design and planning. A course on research methods provides knowledge and skills in specific research methods used in the field of technology and operations management, such as design methods and analytical quantitative methods. Next to these core courses, you will create your own profile with two elective courses. You will complete your MSc study with a master thesis project so as to prove your academic abilities. This last phase of the study offers the opportunity to produce an academic piece of work in the field of technology and operations management and to explore this area in depth. In your thesis, you will demonstrate and report in a systematic, objective and verifiable way, on the knowledge you have acquired and contributions you made in line with academic research. Upon completing the Master Technology and Operations Management you are able to define, diagnose and analyse operations management problems in technology intensive (service) industries and develop and evaluate solution approaches and technological innovations. You will be able to develop new planning and control concepts to improve processes and can assess product and process innovations in terms of their possible impact on the socio-technical system of the firm. You will be able to communicate results orally and in writing both to an audience of researchers and managers.

141


The MSc Technology and Operations Management starts twice a year: September and February. Double Degree programmes MSc Technology and Operations Management offers the following Double Degree programme: with the Newcastle University Business School, Newcastle: MSc in Technology and Operations Management (FEB, RUG) and MSc in Operations and Supply Chain Management (Newcastle University). The TOM Double Degree programme has one entry date: September. For further information see section E.13. Career prospects In this master programme you will be prepared for a career as an operations manager in a production, distribution or service environment, as a consultant in the field of innovation and/or technology, a project manager for product and/or process innovations, a product development manager, or a quality manager. Alternatively, you might opt for an academic career and start as a PhD student or you might opt for the government sector. D.16.2.

Degree programme

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 1.1 2.1

142

MSc Technology and Operations Management/TOM 1 core programme MSc TOM

course title elective(s) MSc TOM (see list)

code

EC 10

C/E C

Operations Management and Control Operations Modelling and Simulation Behavioural Operations Management Research Methods for TOM Master’s Thesis TOM Asset Management Facility Design and Planning or Product & Service Development

EBM041A05 EBM029A05 EBM032A05 EBM031A05 EBM766B20 EBM024A05 EBM025A05 EBM760B05

5 C 5 C 5 C 5 C 20 C 5 C 5 EG A 5 EG A

lang EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN


NB

· · · · · ·

Students choose 5 ECs from option group A. Students choose 10 ECs from ‘electives MSc TOM’ (see list). They also may choose the course from option group A they have not already taken. If you start the MSc TOM in February please note the following changes: Behavioural Operations Management in sem. IIb, Research Methods for TOM in sem. IIb, Master’s Thesis TOM in sem. I (resulting in 'Product & Service Development' to be the most logical choice for option group A)..

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 D.16.3.

MSc Technology and Operations Management/TOM 1 electives MSc TOM

course title Healthcare Operations Managerial Decision Making and Control Operations Management in Proc. Industry Planning and Scheduling Methods Strategic Management & Technology Inventory Management Process Improvement & Quality Control Purchasing Innovation & Entrepreneurship Service Operations

code EBM034A05 EBM027A05 EBM725C05 EBM030A05 EBM051A05 EBM026A05 EBM036A05 EBM037A05 EBM621A05 EBM634A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN E EN



Rules and choices

Rules and choices MSc in Technology and Operations Management Master’s information days November and April/May Entry requirements for the Master’s degree programme

Bachelor’s degree in Business Administration, or Business Economics, or Econometrics and Operations Research, or Economics and Business Economics, or International Business, or Technology Management, or Industrial Engineering and Management or completed Pre-MSc TOM programme, and

143





144

at least 20 ECs from the Master’s programme have been obtained. Apply via Progress, no later than 6 weeks before starting the Master’s Thesis. See the information on the FEB infonet.


D.17.

Research Master in Economics and Business

D.17.1.


Programme Director: Dr J.T. van der Vaart, [email protected], 050-363 7060 Programme Coordinator: Dr M.A. Haan, [email protected], 050-363 7327 Research Coordinator: Mrs A.C. Koning, [email protected], 050-363 3815 Language: English Objectives and content The Research Master Programme is a two-year programme aiming at the best, brightest, and most ambitious students. It is run by SOM gradute school. The aim of the programme is to train students in conducting research in Economics and/or Business. There is a strong focus on scientific and academic skills. The programme is especially designed for students who are looking for an intellectual challenge. Graduates are ideally placed to become PhD students or to obtain research positions in public or private organizations. The Research Master Programme is selective in that only the most outstanding students are admitted. Also, the most outstanding researchers are involved in teaching this programme. These lecturers are both from Groningen and, through our participation in national and international networks, also from outside Groningen. The small scale of the programme ensures an intensive exchange of knowledge, both between lecturers and students and among students themselves. Each student is individually supervised by a renowned researcher. The Research Master in Economics and Business starts once a year: September. Profiles Economics, Econometrics and Finance; Global Economics and Management; Human Resource Management and Organizational Behaviour; Innovation and Organization; Marketing; and Operations Management and Operations Research. Admission Each Bachelor’s degree in business, economics or econometrics and operations research gives access to this Master’s programme. Also motivated students with other Bachelor degrees (like Sociology, Mathematics, Psychology) are welcome to apply. There is a selection procedure for this programme. Criteria for admission include motivation, talent, research attitude, good/excellent study results, and an excellent command of English. The latter can be demonstrated by holding a degree from a Dutch university or an institution at which English is the language of instruction, or by scoring at least 92 on the TOEFL (internet-based) or 6.5 on the IELTS. For students with a degree from a non-Dutch university, a GRE or GMAT test is also required.

145


Career prospects Graduates from our Research Master are ideally placed to become PhD students or to obtain research positions in public or private organizations. Research Master graduates have obtained PhD positions at the universities of Antwerp (Belgium), Bocconi (Milan, Italy), Rotterdam, Sydney (Australia), Tilburg, Leiden and of course Groningen, but others have started working at, for instance, Accenture, McKinsey, the Dutch Ministry of Social Affairs and Employment, and the Dutch Central Bank. Information For more information (e.g. about tuition fees and applications) please contact SOM's research coordinator, Mrs A.C. Koning (tel.: 050-363 3815, e-mail: [email protected]). D.17.2.

Degree programme

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2

course title elective(s) Research Master A (see list)

146

code

elective(s) Research Master B (see list) Macroeconomic Theory Research in Economics and Business I Microeconomic Theory Research in Economics and Business II Monetary Theory Research in Economics and Business III Research in Economics and Business IV Theoretical Corporate Finance

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1-2 + 2.1-2

Research Master in Economics and Business 1 Economics, Econometrics & Finance

EBM127A05 EBM132A05 EBM128A05 EBM133A05 EBM129A05 EBM134A05 EBM135A05 EBM857B05

EC 10

C/E lang C EN

10

C

EN

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C C C C C C C C


EC 10

C/E lang C EN

10

C

Research Master in Economics and Business 1 Global Economics & Management

course title elective(s) Research Master A (see list) elective(s) Research Master B (see list)

code

EN


1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2

International Business for ReMa Research in Economics and Business I Economic Growth and Development Research in Economics and Business II Comparative Institutional Anal. for ReMa Research in Economics and Business III Recent Developments in Intern. Economics Research in Economics and Business IV

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C C C C C C C C


Research Master in Economics and Business 1 Human Resource Management & Organizational Behaviour


code

elective(s) Research Master B (see list) Creativity and Innovation Research in Economics and Business I Leadership & Power Research in Economics and Business II Research in Economics and Business III Team Work & Work Design Behavioural Ethics in Organizations Research in Economics and Business IV


EBM891B05 EBM132A05 EBM890B05 EBM133A05 EBM122A05 EBM134A05 EBM131A05 EBM135A05

EBM124A05 EBM132A05 EBM126A05 EBM133A05 EBM134A05 EBM139A05 EBM120A05 EBM135A05

EC 10

C/E lang C EN

10

C

EN

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C C C C C C C C


EC 10

C/E lang C EN

10

C

EN

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C C C C C C C C


Research Master in Economics and Business 1 Innovation & Organization


code

elective(s) Research Master B (see list) Organizing Innovation & Change for ReMa Research in Economics and Business I Organization Theory for ReMa Research in Economics and Business II Managing Inf. & Control for Innovation Research in Economics and Business III Inter-Firm Cooperation for Innovation Research in Economics and Business IV


147




Marketing Theory Research in Economics and Business I Consumer Research Research in Economics and Business II Advanced Market Response Modelling Research in Economics and Business III Advanced Consumer Choice Modelling Research in Economics and Business IV

148


EC 10

C/E lang C EN

10

C

EN

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C C C C C C C C


Research Master in Economics and Business 1 Operations Management & Operations Research


code

elective(s) Research Master B (see list) Analysis and Planning of Operations Research in Economics and Business I Advanced Models in Operations Research in Economics and Business II Research in Economics and Business III Supply Chain Management Research Research in Economics and Business IV Service Operations Research


code

elective(s) Research Master B (see list)


Research Master in Economics and Business 1 Marketing

EBM770C05 EBM132A05 EBM001A05 EBM133A05 EBM134A05 EBM137A05 EBM135A05 EBM136A05

EC 10

C/E lang C EN

10

C

EN

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C C C C C C C C


Research Master in Economics and Business 1 electives Research Master A

course title Analysis and Planning of Operations Creativity and Innovation

code EC EBM770C05 5 EBM124A05 5

C/E lang E EN E EN


1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2

International Business for ReMa Macroeconomic Theory Marketing Theory Organizing Innovation & Change for ReMa Advanced Models in Operations Consumer Research Economic Growth and Development Leadership & Power Microeconomic Theory Organization Theory for ReMa Advanced Market Response Modelling Comparative Institutional Anal. for ReMa Managing Inf. & Control for Innovation Monetary Theory Supply Chain Management Research Team Work & Work Design Advanced Consumer Choice Modelling Behavioural Ethics in Organizations Inter-Firm Cooperation for Innovation Recent Developments in Intern. Economics Service Operations Research Theoretical Corporate Finance

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2

sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 2.1-2

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E

EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C/E E E E E E E E

lang EN EN EN EN EN EN EN

EC 30

C/E lang C EN

Research Master in Economics and Business 1 electives Research Master B

course title Multivariate Data Analysis Experimental Research Design Applied Macroeconometrics Applied Microeconometrics Survey Research Case Study Research Productivity and Efficiency Analysis

Programme: Year:

EBM891B05 EBM127A05 EBM894A05 EBM018A05 EBM001A05 EBM123A05 EBM890B05 EBM126A05 EBM128A05 EBM017A05 EBM119A05 EBM122A05 EBM019A05 EBM129A05 EBM137A05 EBM139A05 EBM118A05 EBM120A05 EBM020A05 EBM131A05 EBM136A05 EBM857B05


Research Master in Economics and Business 2

course title additional MSc courses (s.t. approval)

code

Master’s Thesis RM E&B

EBM897A30 30

C

EN

149


D.17.3.



Rules and choices

Rules and choices Research Master’s in Economics and Business Master’s information days November and April/May Entry requirements for the Master’s degree programme

Every Bachelor’s degree in business, economics or econometrics gives access to this Master’s programme. Also motivated students with other Bachelor degrees (like Sociology, Mathematics, Psychology) are welcome to apply. There is a selection procedure for this programme. Criteria for admission include motivation, talent, research attitude, good/excellent study results, and an excellent command of English. The latter can be demonstrated by holding a degree from a Dutch university or an institution at which English is the language of instruction, or by scoring at least 92 on the TOEFL (internet-based) or 6.5 on the IELTS. Starting time for the Master’s degree 1 September. programme Entry requirements for Master’s Consult the course descriptions in Ocasys. courses Approval of the Master’s Apply via Progress, no later than 6 weeks programme before starting the Master’s Thesis. See the information on the FEB infonet.

150


D.18.

MSc Lerarenopleiding Economie en Bedrijfswetenschappen

D.18.1.


Opleidingsdirecteur: dr. P.P.M. Smid, 050-363 3668, [email protected] Opleidingscoördinatoren: drs. L. Wouda, [email protected] en drs. M. Eldering,[email protected], 050-363 3738 Studieadviseur: Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Taal: Nederlands Doel/inhoud Door deze masteropleiding word je een communicatieve econoom of bedrijfskundige. Je leert je vakkennis productief, creatief en communicatief toepassen. Je bent econoom en/of bedrijfskundige en je manifesteert je als ontwerper, instructeur, coach, presentator en onderzoeker. Als je klaar bent met deze masteropleiding kun je met groepen leerlingen en studenten omgaan. Je kunt ook anderen individueel coachen. Je weet bovendien de weg in het onderwijs. In het eerste masterjaar volg je hoofdzakelijk het programma van een Master of Science bij de Faculteit Economie en Bedrijfskunde. Binnen dat programma maak je kennis met de lerarenopleiding: je volgt in dat jaar in het tweede semester de praktijkgerichte vakken Basiscursus Master Lerarenopleiding (5 EC) en Masterstage 1 Leraar Economie (5 EC), waaraan een korte stage verbonden is In het tweede masterjaar word je vanuit de praktijk opgeleid tot docent, coach en tot economisch en/of bedrijfskundig vakspecialist. Er is ruimschoots de gelegenheid om in dit praktijkjaar je eigen specialisatie in het educatieve en communicatieve veld te kiezen en te realiseren. Je rondt in het tweede masterjaar ook je vakmaster af. Zo haal je twee mastertitels in twee jaar. Bovendien behoort een betaalde schoolstage in het laatste masterjaar tot de mogelijkheden. Voor studenten die na afronding van hun vakmaster alsnog de lerarenopleiding zouden willen doen is er een eenjarige master: de MSc-opleiding tot Leraar Voorbereidend Hoger Onderwijs. De MSc Lerarenopleiding Economie en Bedrijfswetenschappen heeft twee instroommomenten: september en februari. Carrièreperspectieven Aan het eind van het traject van de lerarenopleiding ben je bevoegd docent in de economische en bedrijfskundige vakken Het traject is ook van belang als je kiest voor een carrière als docent op het HBO of het WO. Maar de masteropleiding is niet alleen gericht op een functie in het onderwijs. Binnen deze studie werk je namelijk zowel aan vakkennis als aan communicatieve en educatieve competenties: je maatschappelijke oriëntatie en beroepskeuzemogelijkheden worden erdoor verbreed.

151


D.18.2.


V = Verplicht; K = Keuze; KG = Keuzegroep; EN = onderwijs wordt in het Engels gegeven; NL = onderwijs wordt in het Nederlands gegeven; zie ook de vakbeschrijvingen in Ocasys. Opleiding: Studiejaar: sem 1.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 NB


vaknaam vakken uit masterprogramma FEB Basiscursus Master Lerarenopleiding Masterstage 1 Leraar economie vakken uit masterprogramma FEB ·

D.18.3.

ULOM1005AL ULOM1105EC

EC V/K taal 30 V NL 5 V NL 5 V NL 20 V NL

Aanbevolen wordt tijdens de bachelorfase de cursus Introductie Lerarenopleiding (EBB816B05) te volgen.

Opleiding: Studiejaar: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1-2 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1-2

vakcode


vaknaam vak(ken) uit masterprogramma FEB

vakcode

EC V/K taal 10 V NL

Masterstage 2 Leraar economie Vakdidactiek 1 economie Onderwijskunde VO Vakdidactiek 2 economie Masterstage 3 Leraar Economie Onderzoek Master Lerarenopleiding

ULOM1215EC ULOM1305EC ULOM1505 ULOM1405EC ULOM1610EC ULOM1710AL

15 5 5 5 10 10

V V V V V V

NL NL NL NL NL NL

Regels en keuzes

Regels en keuzes MSc Lerarenopleiding Economie en Bedrijfswetenschappen Mastervoorlichting November en april/mei Toelatingseis Lerarenopleiding

152

BSc Bedrijfseconomie, of BSc Econometrics & Operations Research, of BSc Economics and Business Economics, of BSc Fiscale Economie, of BSc Accountancy & Controlling, of BSc Bedrijfskunde, of BSc International Business, of BSc Technologiemanagement. Om naast de bevoegdheid voor Management en Organisatie ook de bevoegdheid voor Algemene Economie te verkrijgen, is bij de laatste vier


Toelatingsaanbeveling Lerarenopleiding

opleidingen (dus A&C, BDK, IB en TM) een aanvullende scholing in algemeen economische vakken vereist (10 EC). Introductie Lerarenopleiding (EBB816B05, bachelorvak, 5 EC, sterk aanbevolen)

153


E.


E.1.

Introduction

The Faculty of Economics and Business offers double degrees at both the graduate and undergraduate level. In the academic year 2009-2010, the Faculty has launched 5 new double degree Master programmes in economics and business-related fields with renowned partner universities in Norway, England, Germany and Hungary. Double degree programmes are already running with partners in China, Indonesia and Sweden. Double degrees afford access to different courses and research areas from those offered at the home institution. They provide students with a deeper and/or broader approach to their chosen field and a range of new electives. Additionally, the programmes offer a level of international exposure that extends beyond the traditional exchange programme. They are designed for students who already participate in on-line global networks and are concerned with global issues. They enable students to understand how their discipline is developing in different parts and sectors of the world. What is the difference between double degrees and joint degrees? Double (or dual) degrees are degrees in which two accredited, degree-awarding institutions cooperate to award two concurrent, independent degrees. Double degrees are developed on the basis of mutual recognition of the curriculum and course content and credits earned (mandatory, core, electives) at the partner institutions. Joint degrees, by comparison, are arrangements in which two institutions collaborate to award a single degree. Joint degrees involve joint curriculum development, joint administration and joint graduation. What are the benefits of double degrees? Particpating in a double degree programme can offer you a number of benefits: you can earn two accredited degrees in two specialisation fields for a fraction of the time and costs of two consecutive degree programmes; you can experience international collaboration and function as a full-time student in another country – and improve your language skills at the same time; you can deepen and broaden knowledge of your specialisation field in a different research and teaching environment; you can expand your international network, and establish academic and professional links in a foreign country; and you can enhance your career opportunities by being an alumnus of two internationally renowned universities in two different countries.

154


E.2.

DD BSc E&BE - Economics-IE&B – Fudan University, Shanghai

E.2.1.


Programme Director: Dr L. Schoonbeek, [email protected], 050-363 3798 Programme Coordinators: Dr E.H. van Leeuwen, [email protected], 050-363 3744 Secretary: Secretariat Global Economics & Management, [email protected], 050363 3458 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/bachelorstudent Language: English Contents On completion of two years of undergraduate study at Fudan University students enter the postpropedeutic phase of the BSc Economics & Business Economics. In the postpropedeutic phase students can choose the specialization Economics or the specialization IE&B. The description of these two specializations of the BSc Economics & Business Economics can be found in section A.5. For students who take the specialization International Economics & Business the study abroad period is optional and not compulsory. On completion of the programme students are awarded two degrees, a Bachelor of Science Economics & Business Economics (specialization Economics or IE&B) from University of Groningen and a Bachelor of Arts (Economics) from Fudan University. E.2.2.

Programme content


Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2

DD BSc E&BE-Economics - Fudan University, Shanghai 1 core programme for DD-students from Shanghai

course title Foreign Dir. Investment & Trade for E&BE International Macroeconomics Matrix Analysis and Optimization Intermediate Mathematics Microeconomics - Industrial Organization Public Finance Capital Structure and Financial Planning Econometrics for Economics Growth, Institutions and Business Economics of Banking

code EBB064A05 EBB841B05 EBB066A05 EBB933B05 EBB067A05 EBB861A05 EBB060A05 EBB814A05 EBB022A05 EBB062A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5


155


2.2 2.2

Empirical Research Paper for Economics History of Economic Thought


sem 2.1-2 2.1-2 1.1-2 1.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.1-2 NB

156

5 5

C C

EN EN

DD BSc E&BE-IE&B – Fudan University, Shanghai 1 core programme for DD-students from Shanghai

course title Foreign Dir. Investment & Trade for E&BE International Macroeconomics Matrix Analysis and Optimization Global Development Studies International Business Strategy for IE&B Microeconomics - Industrial Organization Capital Structure and Financial Planning Econometrics for IE&B Growth, Institutions and Business Economics of Banking Empirical Research Paper for IE&B Philosophy and Ethics of Business


EBB020B05 EBB934A05

code EBB064A05 EBB841B05 EBB066A05 EBB921B05 EBB023B05 EBB067A05 EBB060A05 EBB070A05 EBB022A05 EBB062A05 EBB071A05 EBB069A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C/E lang C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN

DD BSc E&BE-IE&B – Fudan University, Shanghai 2 core programme for DD-students from Shanghai

course title Bachelor’s Thesis IE&B Spec. Course IE&B electives (to be approved by prog.coord) or study abroad 30 EC 3rd year course(s) in Economics or Development Economics or Spec. Course other than SC IE&B

code EBB879A10 EBB029A10

EBB811A10

EC C/E 10 C 10 C 30 EG A

lang EN EN EN

30 10 10 10

EN EN EN EN

EG A EG B EG B EG B

Students take either 30 ECs electives (to be approved by programme coordinator) or study abroad. Students choose 10 ECs from option group B


E.3.

DD BSc EOR – Fudan University, Shanghai

E.3.1.


Programme Director: Prof. M.H. van der Vlerk, [email protected], 050-363 3816 Programme Coordinator: Prof. T.J. Wansbeek, [email protected], 050-363 8339 Secretary: Mrs M.A. Koolman, [email protected], 050-363 7018 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/bachelorstudent Language: English Contents On completion of two years of undergraduate study at Fudan University, students enter the postpropedeutic phase of the BSc Econometrics and Operations Research. The description of the programme BSc EOR can be found in section A.4. On completion of the programme students are awarded two degrees, a Bachelor of Science (Economics and Operations Research) from the University of Groningen and a Bachelor of Arts (Economics) from Fudan University. E.3.2.

Programme content

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2

DD BSc EOR - Fudan University, Shanghai 1 core programme for DD students from Shanghai

course title Macroeconomics for EOR Matrices, Graphs and Convexity Statistical Inference Difference- & Differential Equations Introduction to Operations Research Linear Models in Statistics Introduction to Actuarial Science Introduction to Econometrics Queueing Theory and Simulation Dynamic Econometrics (for EOR year 2) Introduction to Mathematical Economics Risk Insurance (for EOR year 2)

code EBB027B05 EBB073A05 EBB075A05 EBB812A05 EBB829A05 EBB072A05 EBB827A05 EBB828A05 EBB074A05 EBB813A05 EBB830A05 EBB863A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C/E lang C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN

157


Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1-2 2.2

158

DD BSc EOR - Fudan University, Shanghai 2 core programme for DD students from Shanghai

course title Game Theory Quantitative Finance (BSc) Stochastic Models Dynamic Econometrics (for EOR year 3) Risk Insurance (for EOR year 3) elective BSc EOR (see list) suitable course(s) FEB (s.t. approval) Bachelor’s Thesis EOR

code EBB872A05 EBB839A05 EBB878A06 EBB813A07 EBB863A07

EBB925A10

EC 5 5 6 7 7 5 15 10



E.4.

DD BSc IB – Universitas Gadjah Mada, Yogyakarta

E.4.1.


Programme Director: Dr. B. Los, [email protected], 050-363 7317 Programme Coordinator: H.A. Ritsema, [email protected], 050-363 3844 Information: Mrs R. van Est, [email protected], 050-363 6692 Secretary: Mrs S. Luijken, [email protected], 050-363 3458 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/bachelorstudent Language: English Contents The students of this double degree programme in International Business undertake two years of undergraduate study at the University of Gadjah Mada in Yogyakarta, Indonesia. This qualifies them for a 3-semester study programme (90 ECTS) at the University of Groningen. The students take courses from the regular BSc International Business programme, including a Bachelor’s Thesis. They will have a BSc International Business diploma when they have completed the study programme in Groningen. For additional information, please refer to the programme description for the BSc International Business, section A.7. E.4.2.

Programme content


Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2

DD BSc IB - Universitas Gadjah Mada, Yogyakarta 1 core programme for DD-students from Yogyakarta

course title Introduction to International Business Foreign Dir. Investment, Trade & Geogr. Organizational Structure CrossCultural Management Global Business History International Financial Management Comparative Country Studies Innovation Management in Multinationals International Marketing for IB Ethics and International Business Management Accounting for IB Research Methodology for IB

code EBP003A05 EBB037A05 EBP670C05 EBB036A05 EBB038B05 EBB627A05 EBB686A05 EBB034A05 EBP661C05 EBB608B05 EBP017B05 EBP662C05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5



159


2.2 2.2 NB

or

160

EBB039B05 EBB635B05

5 5

EG A EN EG A EN

Students choose 5 ECs from option group A UGM students that have already taken Management Accounting in UGM’s International Undergraduate Programme can substitute this course with the remaining elective.

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2

Global Political Economy International Business Law

DD BSc IB - Universitas Gadjah Mada, Yogyakarta 2 core programme for DD-students from Yogyakarta

course title Bachelor’s Thesis IB Empirical Research Project for IB International Strategic Management Managing Intern. Bus. Organizations Game

code EBB737B10 EBB044A05 EBB628A05 EBB638B05

EC 10 5 5 5

C/E lang C EN C EN C EN C EN


E.5.

DD BSc IB – Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta

E.5.1.


Programme Director: Dr. B. Los, [email protected], 050-363 7317 Programme Coordinator: H.A. Ritsema, [email protected], 050-363 3844 Information: Mrs R. van Est, [email protected], 050-363 6692 Secretary: Mrs S. Luijken, [email protected], 050-363 3458 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/studentsupport/bachelorstudent Language: English Contents The students of this double degree programme in International Business undertake two years of undergraduate study at the University Indonesia in Jakarta, Indonesia. This qualifies them for a 3-semester study at programme (90 ECs) at the University of Groningen. Students who do not meet all requirements, may be admitted to a 4-semester study programma (120 ECs) in Groningen. The students take courses from the regular BSc International Business programme, including a Bachelor’s Thesis. They will have a BSc International Business diploma when they have completed the study programme in Groningen. For additional information, please refer to the programme description for the BSc International Business, section A.7. E.5.2.

Programme content

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2

DD BSc IB - Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta 1 core programme for DD students from Jakarta

course title Introduction to International Business Foreign Dir. Investment, Trade & Geogr. Organizational Structure CrossCultural Management Global Business History International Financial Management Comparative Country Studies Innovation Management in Multinationals International Marketing for IB Ethics and International Business

code EBP003A05 EBB037A05 EBP670C05 EBB036A05 EBB038B05 EBB627A05 EBB686A05 EBB034A05 EBP661C05 EBB608B05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5



161


2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 NB

Management Accounting for IB Research Methodology for IB Global Political Economy or International Business Law

162

5 5 5 5

C C EG A EG A

EN EN EN EN

Students choose 5 ECs from option group A UI students that have already taken Management Accounting in UI’s International Undergraduate’s Programme can substitute this course with the remaining elective.

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2

EBP017B05 EBP662C05 EBB039B05 EBB635B05

DD BSc IB - Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta 2 core programme for DD students from Jakarta

course title Bachelor’s Thesis IB Empirical Research Project for IB International Strategic Management Managing Intern. Bus. Organizations Game

code EBB737B10 EBB044A05 EBB628A05 EBB638B05

EC 10 5 5 5



E.6.

DD MSc Finance – UAIC of IASI, Romania

E.6.1.


Coördinator: Dr O.V. Iftime, [email protected], 050-363 3485 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Key facts Start of programme: Duration (in semesters): Total credits: Language: Type of degree:

Admission:

Application: Tuition fees 2013 – 2014:

1 September (Year 2 of the 2-year DD, at RUG) 4 120 ECs English MSc in Finance (University of Groningen) MSc in Finance and Risk Management Graduates will also receive a diploma supplement on which it is noted that the RUG degree is awarded within the framework of the double degree programme with Alexandru Ioan Cuza University. The admission requirements for this double degree are the same as those for the MSc Finance and Risk Management at UAIC. Students are then selected for the second phase of the DD programme in Groningen. Through Alexandru Ioan Cuza University EEA students: € 1,835 Non EEA students: € 13,000

Programme profile The programme is modular in structure, comprises 120 ECs credits and is a two-year full-time programme. Students will take Year 1 at Alexandru Ioan Cuza University in Iaşi, Romania, and Year 2 at the Faculty of Economics and Business of the University of Groningen. The first phase of the DD programme at UAIC is modeled after the pre-MSc programme offered by RUG-FEB for the MSc Finance. After completing the first phase, students can be selected by UAIC and RUG to enter the second phase of the DD programme, which is RUG-FEB’s MSc Finance, with an adapted curriculum. Supervision for the dissertation is managed jointly by the institutions.

163


Programme structure (for students from Iasi, 2012-2014) DD MSc Finance – UAIC of Iasi, Romania Master’s Year 1 Semester 1 (UAIC) Semester 2 (UAIC) 30 EC compulsory courses from the MSc Finance and Risk Management at UAIC

30 EC compulsory and elective courses from the MSc Finance and Risk Management at UAIC

Master’s Year 2 Semester 3 (FEB) 30 EC compulsory courses from the MSc Finance at FEB

Semester 3 (FEB or UAIC) 10 EC electives at FEB or UAIC; 20 EC joint Master thesis at RUG or UAIC under joint FEB/UAIC supervision, with final grading by FEB and UAIC

Further information Mr Orest Iftime, [email protected], 050-363 3485 E.6.2.

Programme content (for students from Iasi, 2012-2014)

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2

course title Study at UAIC, Iasi

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1-2

164

DD MSc Finance – UAIC of Iasi, Romania 1 core programme for students from Iasi code

EC 60

C/E lang C EN

DD MSc Finance – UAIC of Iasi, Romania 2 core programme for students from Iasi

course title Corporate Finance for MSc Finance Derivative Instruments Research Methods in Finance Corporate Valuation for MSc Finance Portfolio Theory Responsible Finance and Investing Master’s Thesis Finance

code EBM008B05 EBM068A05 EBM070A05 EBM007C05 EBM015B05 EBM071A05 EBM866B20

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 20

C/E C C C C C C C

lang EN EN EN EN EN EN EN


2.1 2.1 2.2

NB

Banking, Insurance and Risk Management and/or Institutional Investment Management and/or Corporate Governance for MSc Finance

EBM067A05

5

EG A EN

EBM822A05

5

EG A EN

EBM811C05

5

EG A EN

Students choose 10 ECs from option group A. Students may choose the 3rd elective course from option group A to replace one of the courses from semester I except for Research Methods in Finance and Portfolio Theory

165


E.7.

DD MSc IB&M – NUBS, Newcastle

E.7.1.


Coördinator: Mr H.A.Ritsema, [email protected], 050-363 3844 Information: Mrs R. (Ineke) van Est, [email protected], 050-363 6692 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Key facts Start of programme: Duration (in semesters): Total credits: Language: Type of degree:

Admission:

Application: Tuition fees 2013 – 2014:

1 September 3 90 ECs English MSc in International Business and Management (University of Groningen); and MSc in Advanced International Business Management & Marketing (for students who start in Groningen, degree from Newcastle University) or MA in Advanced International Business Management (for students who start in Newcastle, degree from Newcastle University). Graduates will also receive a diploma supplement in Groningen on which it is noted that the RUG degree is awarded within the framework of the double degree programme with Newcastle University. For students who start in Groningen: The admission requirements for this double degree are the same as those for the MSc International Business & Management plus a GPA of 7 or above and proof of English skills (TOEFL 580 or comparable). For students who start in Newcastle: The admission requirements for this double degree are the same as those for the MSc International Business Management of NUBS. FEB: Please go to: www.rug.nl/howtoapply NUBS: Through Newcastle University Business School For students who start in Groningen: EEA students € 6,500 for the complete duration of the programme, until 1 March 2015 Non EEA students € 19,000 for the complete duration of the programme, until 1 March 2015 (to be paid to the University of Groningen) Students who start in Newcastle must pay a tuition fee to Newcastle University Business School.

Programme profile The Double Degree MSc in International Business & Management is a highly unique degree programme, delivered by two academically renowned European institutions Newcastle University Business School and the University of Groningen. The overall aim of the programme is to provide a pre-experience Masters qualification in

166


business management with a strong international dimension. Specifically the programme aims to provide participants with an opportunity to engage with the issues experienced by internationally oriented organisations. Within this context, attention is paid to the comparative analyses of countries, institutions, cultures and the strategic decision-making of companies operating within this environment. The collaborative approach to this programme provides you with the opportunity to: study a distinctive and internationally focused curriculum in business and management; study at two highly respected and traditionally focused universities; gain a postgraduate dual award (MA and MSc) degree enabling participants to prepare for and/or further develop a successful career in international business and management; and live in two of Europe’s most exciting and friendly cities. The programme is modular in structure, comprises 180 credits and is a full-time programme of 17 months. You will take one semester at the Faculty of Economics and Business at the University of Groningen and one semester at Newcastle University Business School. Supervision for the dissertation is managed jointly by the two institutions, but you will be given the choice as to which university to undertake your dissertation from. Programme structure (2012-2014) for students who start in Groningen:: DD MSc IB&M - NUBS, Newcastle Master’s Year 1 Semester 1 (FEB) Semester 2 (NUBS) 30 EC Compulsory 30 EC courses and MSc IB&M courses electives at NUBS

Master’s Year 2 Semester 3 (FEB and NUBS) 5 EC elective MSc IB&M Writing joint Master thesis at RUG or NUBS under joint FEB/NUBS supervision, with final grading by FEB and NUBS.

for students who start in Newcastle: DD MSc IB&M - NUBS, Newcastle Master’s Year 1 Semester 1 (NUBS) Semester 2 (FEB) 30 EC courses and 30 EC Compulsory electives at NUBS MSc IB&M courses 5 EC elective MSc IB&M

Master’s Year 2 Semester 3 (FEB and NUBS) Writing joint Master thesis at RUG or NUBS under joint FEB/NUBS supervision, with final grading by FEB and NUBS

What will you learn? The Double Degree MSc in International Business & Management aims to provide you with an opportunity to engage with the issues experienced by internationally orientated organisations. Within this context, attention is paid to the comparative analyses of countries, institutions, cultures and the strategic decision making of

167


companies operating within this environment. More specifically, the programme aims to provide candidates with: An ability to apply your knowledge and understanding of international business management to complex issues, both systematically and creatively. An in-depth knowledge of marketing theories, including advanced skills in the analysis of markets in an international context. An understanding of management, leadership and business practice within international organisations. An opportunity to conceptualise real world problems using analytical frameworks drawn from marketing, international marketing and international business theory. An ability to critically evaluate these issues within the context of the activities of businesses, government and non-governmental organisations. Career prospects The programme has been designed for individuals who aspire to a career in international business management and will prepare students for a range of positions in international, multinational or transnational companies. Further information Mrs R. (Ineke) van Est-van der Weg, [email protected], 050-363 6692 E.7.2.

Programme content (for students who started in Groningen, 2012-14)

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1-2

168

DD MSc IB&M – NUBS, Newcastle 1 core programme for students from FEB

course title Comparative Institutional Anal. for IB&M Foreign Dir. Investment & Trade (MSc) International Business Strategy (MSc) International Corporate Finance International Strategic Alliances Research Seminar for IB&M Study at NUBS, Newcastle

code EBM084A05 EBM086A05 EBM088A05 EBM098A05 EBM090A05 EBM718B05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 30



Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 1.1-2 NB

E.7.3.

DD MSc IB&M – NUBS, Newcastle 2 core programme for students from FEB

course title elective MSc IB&M Master’s Thesis IB&M - DD Newcastle

code EBM091A25

EC 5 25

C/E lang E EN C EN

If students write their thesis in Newcastle they must do the 5 ECs elective course in semester I of year 1 (instead of semester I of year 2)

Programme content (for students who started in Newcastle, 2012-14)

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 NB

course title Study at NUBS, Newcastle Comparative Corporate Governance Foreign Dir. Investment & Trade (MSc) International Business Strategy (MSc) International Entrepreneurship elective MSc IB&M Emerging Markets (MSc) Research Seminar for IB&M

code EBM083A05 EBM086A05 EBM088A05 EBM089A05 EBM085A05 EBM718B05

EC 30 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

C/E lang C EN C EN C EN C EN C EN E EN C EN C EN

If students write their thesis in Groningen they can choose to substitute either Comparative Corporate Governance or International Entrepreneurship with Comparative Institutional Analysis

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 1.1

DD MSc IB&M – NUBS, Newcastle 1 core programme for students from Newcastle

DD MSc IB&M – NUBS, Newcastle 2 core programme for students from Newcastle

course title Master’s Thesis IB&M - DD Newcastle Comparative Institutional Anal. for IB&M


EC 25 5

C/E lang C EN E EN

169


E.8.

DD MSc IE&B – Corvinus University, Budapest

E.8.1.


Coordinator: t.b.a. Secretary: Secretariat GEM, [email protected], 050-363 3546 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Key facts Start of programme: Duration (in semesters): Total credits: Language: Type of degree:

Admission:

Application: Tuition fees 2013 - 2014

NB

170

1 September 4 120 ECs English MSc in International Economics and Business (University of Groningen); and MA in International Economy and Business (Corvinus University Budapest), specialisation Central-East European economies. Graduates will also receive a diploma supplement from FEB-RUG on which it is noted that the degree is awarded within the framework of the double degree programme with Corvinus University Budapest. For incoming students from CUB, the admission requirements for this specialisation are the same as those for the MA in International Economy and Business. For outgoing students from FEB, the admission requirements are the same as those for the MSc International Economics and Business Master’s degree programme, with an additional requirement that candidates for both the double degree Master and the Master certificate programme should have at least a GPA of ≥7. In selecting candidates, the respective selection committees will also take account of factors such as motivation and relevant knowledge of international/development economics. Online, please go to: www.rug.nl/howtoapply Maximum number of RUG students admitted: 5 EEA students: € 1,835 per year Non EEA students: € 13,000 per year An extra participation fee may be required for the period spent at the partner university. For more information please visit the DD website.

Outgoing FEB students remain registered in the RUG MSc IE&B programme until they have completed the 120 ECs of the DD programme. Incoming CUB students remain registered in the CUB MA International Economy and Business until they have completed the 120 ECss of the DD programme. They register at RUG in their final semester in order to be eligible for a Dutch degree certificate (students with exchange status are not eligible for Dutch degree certificates).


Programme profile Corvinus University Budapest offers degrees in multiple disciplines, but it is known for its programmes in economics and management. As the country’s leading institution in business education, the Faculty provides education and research in the field of Hungarian economic policies embedded in a European and global context. One of the main assets of the Faculty is its firm commitment to a better perception of Central and Eastern Europe. The Faculty offers a wide range of relevant topics in the field of global economics, the European Community and the CEE region, thus providing the necessary knowledge for those individuals who wish to embark on a career in international or domestic institutions of economic management or governmental agencies. Business leaders and others who wish to embark on a career in international management or public policy have to understand the trends in the world economy, including the European Community and the CEE region. What makes this DD programme so unique is the combination of topics in the field of international business and international economics, with a special focus on issues of economic transformation and integration, as well as the attention paid to the links between the fields. Topics range from international trade and investment to the consequences of globalization for strategic decision-making, in particular trade and capital flows in relation to multinational enterprises and the socio-economic and institutional differences between countries, with a special focus on the CEE-region. You are trained to become broadly oriented economists with a strong international profile and a thorough analytical understanding of the main current trends in the global world of international (economic) policy and business organizations, ranging from the fields of international business and economics to international politics and international law. The core content of the programme reflects the increasing globalisation and continuous evolution of international economics and business. As a BSc E&BE graduate and a student admitted directly to the MSc International Economics and Business (IE&B) at FEB-RUG, Groningen you can apply for admission to the DD Master CEE specialisation prior to starting the MSc IE&B or during their first (winter) semester. When admitted to the MA International Economy and Business at CUB, Budapest you can apply for admission to the DD Master CEE specialisation. You need to complete the first year (60 ECs) of the 2-year MA at CUB with above-average grades and satisfy the specific DD admission requirements agreed by the two partners. In order to be eligible for the Dutch MSc degree at FEB, you need to satisfy the graduation requirements of RUG (see below).

171


Programme structure (2012-2014) for students from FEB: MSc DD IE&B - Corvinus University, Budapest Master’s Year 1 Master’s Year 2 Semester 1 (FEB) Semester 2 (CUB) Semester 3 (CUB) 15 EC compulsory 30 EC CEE core and 30 EC CEE core and MSc IE&B courses specialisation courses specialisation and 15 EC core from MA Int. courses from MA elective/elective Economy and Int. Economy and courses (total 30 EC) Business Business

Semester 4 (FEB) 10 EC core elective/elective courses, 20 EC Master’s thesis FEB thesis supervisor, FEB & CUB thesis graders + comprehensive exam CUB

for students from Corvinus: MSc DD IE&B - Corvinus University, Budapest Master’s Year 1 Master’s Year 2 Semester 1 (CUB) Semester 2 (CUB) Semester 3 (FEB) 30 EC compulsory, 30 EC compulsory, 15 EC compulsory specialisation and specialisation and MSc IE&B courses elective MA elective MA and 15 EC core International International elective/elective Economy and Economy and courses (total 30 EC) Business courses at Business courses at CUB CUB

Semester 4 (FEB) 10 EC core elective/elective courses 20 EC Master’s thesis (total 30 EC) FEB thesis supervisor, FEB & CUB thesis graders + comprehensive exam CUB

What will you learn? Having completed this double degree programme, you will have: knowledge and expertise in the ways individual, group and organizational factors influence organizational performance, problem solving and strategic decision making; insight into the consequences of globalisation for multinational enterprises, and the socio-economic and institutional differences between countries, in particular CEE countries; the ability to apply the tools of modern economic analysis to issues of development policy; and acquired analytical and business skills in an international context the capacity to evaluate critically different approaches to development analysis and policy.

172


Career prospects This double degree programme has been designed for individuals who aspire to a career in national, international, multinational or transnational institutions and enterprises such as: international economist and strategy expert in a multinational corporation; staff member with an (inter)national governmental organisations such as IMF, Worldbank, OECD, WTO, ECB, ODI or the EU; professional economist on development and Central-East European transition, economic issues in international agencies, governments or the private sector; economic consultant with an (inter)national governmental organization; and business consultant with an internationally operating consultancy firm. Further information http://www.rug.nl/masters/ddm-central-east-european-economies/ E.8.2.

Programme content (for students from FEB)

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2

course title core elective/elective DD MSc IE&B - CUB Foreign Dir. Investment & Trade (MSc) International Business Strategy (MSc) core elect./electives DD MSc IE&B - CUB Research Seminar for IE&B Study at CUB, Budapest


DD MSc IE&B – Corvinus University, Budapest 1 core programme for students from FEB code EBM086A05 EBM088A05 EBM846B05

EC 5 5 5 10 5 30

C/E lang C EN C EN C EN C EN C AR C EN

DD MSc IE&B – Corvinus University, Budapest 1 core electives DD MSc IE&B - CUB



EC 5 5 5 5 5 5


173


Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.2 NB

DD MSc IE&B – Corvinus University, Budapest 1 electives DD MSc IE&B - CUB

course title Comparative Institutional Anal. for IB&M International Strategic Alliances Comparative Corporate Governance International Entrepreneurship Emerging Markets (MSc)

code EBM084A05 EBM090A05 EBM083A05 EBM089A05 EBM085A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5


Students choose 15 ECs of core electives DD MSc IE&B - CUB and 10 ECs of electives DD MSc IE&B - CUB. Students from FEB can take core electives or elective courses DD MSc IE&B - CUB in semester 1 of year 1 and/or in semester 2 of year 2. Students from Budapest take core elective or elective courses DD MSc IE&B - CUB in year 2

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 2.1-2 2.1 E.8.3.

DD MSc IE&B – Corvinus University, Budapest 2 core programme for students from FEB

course title Study at CUB, Budapest Master’s Thesis IE&B core elect./electives DD MSc IE&B - CUB

code EBM868A20

EC 30 20 10

C/E lang C EN C EN C EN

Programme content (for students from CUB)


174

DD MSc IE&B – Corvinus University, Budapest 1 core programme for students from Budapest

course title Study at CUB, Budapest

code

EC 60

C/E lang C EN






EC 5 5 5 5 5 5


DD MSc IE&B – Corvinus University, Budapest 1 electives DD MSc IE&B - CUB



EC 5 5 5 5 5


Students choose 15 ECs of core electives DD MSc IE&B - CUB and 10 ECs of electives DD MSc IE&B - CUB. Students from FEB can take core electives or elective courses DD MSc IE&B - CUB in semester 1 of year 1 and/or in semester 2 of year 2. Students from Budapest take core elective or elective courses DD MSc IE&B - CUB in year 2

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1

DD MSc IE&B – Corvinus University, Budapest 1 core electives DD MSc IE&B - CUB

DD MSc IE&B – Corvinus University, Budapest 2 core programme for students from Budapest

course title core elective/elective DD MSc IE&B - CUB Foreign Dir. Investment & Trade (MSc) International Business Strategy (MSc) core elect./electives DD MSc IE&B - CUB Research Seminar for IE&B Master’s Thesis IE&B core elect./electives DD MSc IE&B - CUB

code EBM086A05 EBM088A05 EBM846B05 EBM868A20

EC 5 5 5 10 5 20 10

C/E lang C EN C EN C EN C EN C AR C EN C EN

175


E.9.

DD MSc IE&B – Georg-August University, Göttingen

E.9.1.


Coordinator: Dr. B. Los, [email protected], 050-363 7317 Secretary: Secretariat GEM, [email protected], 050-363 3546 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Key facts Start of programme: Duration (in semesters): Total credits: Language: Type of degree:

Admission:

Application:

Tuition fees 2013 - 2014

1 September 4 120 ECs English MSc in International Economics and Business (University of Groningen); and MA in International Economics, specialization Development Economics (Georg-August-University Göttingen). Graduates will receive two diploma supplements on which it will be noted that the respective degrees are awarded within the framework of the double degree programme between GeorgAugust-University Göttingen and the University of Groningen. The admission requirements for this specialisation are the same as those for the MSc International Economics and Business Master’s degree programme, with an additional requirement that candidates should have at least a GPA of ≥7 and that the grade of the Bachelor degree thesis is ≥ 7.5. In selecting candidates, the respective selection committees will also take account of factors such as motivation and relevant knowledge of international/development economics. For students not yet enrolled in the MSc IE&B programme, please go to: www.rug.nl/howtoapply The application deadline for students enrolled in the FEB MSc IE&B, who start at Göttingen in the 2nd semester, is 15 November For all other applicants, the application deadline (via Studielink and OAS) is May 1st EEA students: € 1,835 per year Non EEA students: € 13,000 per year An extra participation fee may be required for the period spent at the partner university. For more information please visit the DD website.

N.B. Students remain enrolled, fee-paying students at the ‘home’ university until they have completed the 120 ECs of the DD programme. GOT students must also enrol as fee-paying students at RUG in order to be eligible for a Dutch degree certificate. Students with exchange status are not eligible for Dutch degree certificates in the Netherlands.

176


Programme structure (2012-2014) for students from FEB: MSc DD IE&B with Göttingen specializing in development economics Master’s Year 1 Master’s Year 2 Semester 1 (FEB) Semester 2 (GOT) Semester 3 (GOT) Semester 4 (FEB) 30 EC compulsory 30 EC (1 compulsory 30 EC: 18 EC 30 EC: compulsory courses and 4 specialization compulsory, 12 EC courses and Master courses and elective elective courses thesis Master courses at GOT)

for students from Göttingen: MSc DD IE&B with Göttingen specializing in applied international and development economics Master’s Year 1 Master’s Year 2 Semester 1 (GOT) Semester 2 (GOT) Semester 3 (FEB) Semester 4 (FEB) 30 EC compulsory, 30 EC compulsory, 30 EC compulsory 30 EC compulsory specialization and specialization and courses courses and elective Master elective Master Master’s thesis courses at GOT courses at GOT

What will you learn? Having completed this double degree programme, you will have: knowledge and expertise in the ways individual, group and organizational factors influence organizational performance, problem solving and strategic decision making; insight into the consequences of globalization for multinational enterprises, and the socio-economic and institutional differences between countries; the use of quantitative and statistical techniques for policy analysis and evaluation in a development context.; the ability to apply the tools of modern economic analysis to issues of development policy; acquired analytical and business skills in an international context; the capacity to evaluate critically different approaches to development analysis and policy that research and applied work in the development field now requires; and the qualifications to enter PhD programmes and work in international research instiutions. Career prospects This double degree programme has been designed for individuals who aspire to a career in national, international, multinational or transnational institutions and enterprises such as: international economist and strategy expert in a multinational corporation; staff member with an (inter)national governmental organisations such as IMF, Worldbank, OECD, WTO, ECB, ODI or the EU;

177


professional economist on development and Central-East European transition economic issues in international agencies, governments or the private sector; economic consultant with an (inter)national governmental organization; and business consultant with an internationally operating consultancy firm. Further information http://www.rug.nl/masters/ddm-international-development-economics/ E.9.2.


C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1-2

course title Competitiveness of Firms and Nations Foreign Dir. Investment & Trade (MSc) International Business Strategy (MSc) Growth and Development Policies Research Seminar for IE&B Trade, Environment and Growth Study at GOT, Göttingen

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 2.1-2 2.1 2.2 E.9.3.

DD MSc IE&B – Georg-August University, Göttingen 1 core programme for students from FEB code EBM092A05 EBM086A05 EBM088A05 EBM095A05 EBM846B05 EBM097A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 30


DD MSc IE&B – Georg-August University, Göttingen 2 core programme for students from FEB

course title Study at GOT, Göttingen Master’s Thesis IE&B International Entrepreneurship Country Studies


EC 30 20 5 5


Programme content (for students from GOT)


178


Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2

course title Study at GOT, Göttingen

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 NB

DD MSc IE&B – Georg-August University, Göttingen 1 core programme for students from Göttingen code

EC 60

C/E lang C EN

DD MSc IE&B – Georg-August University, Göttingen 2 core programme for students from Göttingen

course title Competitiveness of Firms and Nations Foreign Dir. Investment & Trade (MSc) International Business Strategy (MSc) Growth and Development Policies Research Seminar for IE&B Trade, Environment and Growth Master’s Thesis IE&B Country Studies Comparative Corporate Governance and/or International Banking and Finance and/or International Entrepreneurship

code EBM092A05 EBM086A05 EBM088A05 EBM095A05 EBM846B05 EBM097A05 EBM868A20 EBM093A05 EBM083A05 EBM096A05 EBM089A05

EC C/E lang 5 C EN 5 C EN 5 C EN 5 C EN 5 C AR 5 C EN 20 C EN 5 C EN 5 EG A EN 5 EG A EN 5 EG A EN

Students choose 5 ECs from option group A.

179


E.10.

DD MSc Economics-IB&M-IE&B – Fudan University, Shanghai

E.10.1.


Director: Prof. S. Brakman, [email protected], 050-363 3746 Coordinator: Dr E.H. van Leeuwen, [email protected], 050-363 3744 Information: Mrs R. van Est, [email protected], 050-363 6692 Secretary: Secretariat GEM, [email protected], 050-363 3458 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Key facts Start of programme: Duration (in semesters): Total credits: Language: Type of degree:

Admission:

Application:


1 September 4 120 ECs English Master of Science (MSc) Economics, MSc International Economics & Business (IE&B) or MSc International Business & Management (IB&M), (University of Groningen); and and Master in Economics (Applied Economics) (Fudan University). Graduates will also receive a diploma supplement from FEB-RUG on which it is noted that the degree is being awarded within the framework of a Double Degree Master in Economics, specialization Applied Economics with the School of Economics, Fudan University. The admission requirements for this programme are identical to the admission requirements for each of the three FEB-RUG MSc programmes involved. In selecting candidates, the selection committee(s) will take account of factors such as motivation, GPA, absence of study delay, interest in gaining a global perspective on world economics and business, and in particular, a desire to develop the skills and knowledge needed for an international career in or involving China. Students who are already registered in one of the 3 abovementioned Master of Science programmes at the RUG can contact Ms. Ineke van Est ([email protected]). Application deadline for students already enroled at FEB-RUG (as Bachelor or Master student): 1 June. All other students can apply online. Please go to: www.rug.nl/howtoapply. The general application deadlines apply. Year 1: regulare tuition fees for Groningen (EEA students: € 1,835 per year; Non EEA students: € 13,000 per year) Year 2: tuition fee Fudan (approx. € 7,500,-); to be paid directly to Fudan at the start of year 2

Programme profile Located in Shanghai, Fudan University (a member of the U21 network, and the C9 league, an alliance of nine most prestigious Chinese universities) is one of the oldest, most prestigious and most selective universities in the People's Republic of China. It

180


is a comprehensive university highly ranked in physical sciences, humanities, social sciences, and medicine. In 2009, Fudan University ranked third overall among universities in mainland China, and in the 2011 QS World University Rankings, it was ranked 91st in the world. In the subject tables compiled by QS for the rankings, Fudan is ranked 45th in the world for social sciences. Currently, Fudan University has over 45,000 students with over 1,700 students from overseas. The School of Economics Fudan University consists of 5 academic departments and 6 research centres, including the Research Institution of World Economics. The school has 138 staff members, of which 34 are professors and 42 associate professors. The School of Economics holds a leading position in the field of domestic economics. The school is equipped with excellent teaching and research facilities such as the multi-language Reference Room and the creative teaching lab. The school has established collaborative information exchange with institutions such as the World Bank, in the USA, Japan and other countries, and has set up a European Communities Center, the first data centre established by the EU in China. As an Economics and Business graduate with a wish to embark on a career as global economists or business strategists, you need to have knowledge of the economic and monetary policies and political economics of leading nations and to recognise trends in the world economy. The Double Degree Master specialization: China and the World Economy is a two-year, (post)graduate Dutch Master of Science (phase 1) and Chinese Master (phase 2) programme comprising a total of 34 Chinese Credits (CC), which is the equivalent of ±120 European Credits (ECs). The programme is structured in two independent parts, with each part lasting one year. Part one takes place in Groningen, where you enrol in one of three Master programmes offered by FEB-RUG: MSc Economics, MSc International Economics and Business, or MSc International Business and Management. You are nominally enrolled as non-fee-paying post-graduate students at the School of Economics, Fudan University. During phase one of the Programme at FEB-RUG you can prepare for part two by taking extra-curricular courses in Basic Chinese (HSK Mandarin I and II), and participating in extra-curricular Sino-Dutch activities organised in Groningen. On successful completion of part one, you graduate with a recognized and accredited Dutch Master of Science degree, and you deregister from FEB-RUG . Part two of the programme takes place in Shanghai, where you enrol as fee-paying students in an English-taught, post-graduate programme at the Fudan University School of Economics. Part one at FEB-RUG replaces Year 1 of the 2-year Master programme at SE-FU. The curriculum in part two focusses on a variety of themes relating to the economy of China and China’s role in South East Asia, among others, Chinese economic theory, international trade, finance, public administration and law. You benefit from seminars at the School of Economics, and attend a major international series of cutting-edge business and finance lectures sponsored by HSBC, as well as Overseas Lecturers’ Short Courses. There is also a 3 CC thesis. This 2-year post-graduate programme offers you the opportunity to gain comprehensive knowledge of the economies, economic policies, strategies, theories and practices of Europe, China and South East Asia and to obtain a global view of world economics. The core content of the programme reflects the increasing globalisation and evolution taking place in the field of economics. In addition, you

181


have the opportunity to experience international student life in two different cultures with sufficient time spent in each environment to obtain a thorough understanding of both cultures, and to graduate after two years with two nationally and internationally recognised Master’s degrees from two outstanding, research-driven institutions in the PR of China and The Netherlands. Programme structure (2012-2014) for students from FEB: DD MSc Economics-IB&M-IE&B - Fudan University, Shanghai Master’s Year 1 (60 European Credits) Master’s Year 2 (19 Chinese Credits) Semester 1 (FEB) 15 EC compulsory and 10 EC elective courses MSc IE&B, MSc Economics or MSc IB&M2 = 30 EC

Semester 2 (FEB) 10 EC core elective/elective courses MSc IE&B, MSc Economics, MSc IB&M, 20 EC Master’s thesis = 30 EC

Semester 3 (FU) 9 CC compulsory and (min.) 2 CC elective courses on themes relating to China and the World Economy = 11 CC

Semester 4 (FU) 3 CC compulsory, (min.) 2 CC electives and 3 CC thesis on theme relating to China and the World Economy = 8 CC

What will you learn? Having completed this double degree programme, you will have: knowledge and expertise in the ways individual, group and organizational factors influence organizational performance, problem solving and strategic decision making; insight into the consequences of globalisation for multinational enterprises, and the socio-economic and institutional differences between countries, in particular differences between countries in Europe, China and South East Asia; the ability to apply the tools of modern economic analysis to issues of development policy; acquired analytical and business skills in an international context; the capacity to evaluate critically different approaches to development analysis and policy; comprehensive knowledge of the economy, business, law, culture and policies of China; and the qualifications to enter PhD programmes and work in international research institutions. Career prospects This double degree programme has been designed for individuals who aspire to a career in national, international, multinational or transnational institutions and enterprises such as:

MSc IB&M students are strongly advised to take economics-related electives in preparation for phase 2 at SE-FU. 2

182


international economist and strategy expert in a multinational corporation; staff member with an (inter)national governmental organisations such as IMF, Worldbank, OECD, WTO, ECB, ODI or the EU; professional economist on development, Chinese and East Asian transition economic issues in international agencies, governments or the private sector; economic consultant with an (inter)national governmental organization; and business consultant with an internationally operating consultancy firm. Further information http://www.rug.nl/masters/ddm-china-and-the-world-economy/ E.10.2.

Programme content (for MSc Economics students from FEB )

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 + 2.1 1.2 + 2.1 2.1-2 NB

course title Empirical Methods of Economics Games and Industrial Organization Macroeconomics for MSc Economics core electives FEB - Econ

code EBM103A05 EBM104A05 EBM836C05

electives FEB - Econ Master’s Thesis Economics

EBM877A20

EC 5 5 5 10


15

C

EN

20

C

EN

In addition to electives FEB - Econ students may also choose remaining courses of core electives FEB - Econ and/or a maximum of 10 ECs from MSc EORAS, MSc Finance and MSc IE&B. NB: It is only possible for students to enter part 2 at Fudan in September.


DD MSc Economics-IB&M-IE&B – Fudan University, Shanghai 1 core programme for students from FEB - Economics

DD MSc Economics-IB&M-IE&B – Fudan University, Shanghai 1 core electives FEB - Economics

course title Competition Policy - Theory and Practice Empirical Macroeconomics


EC 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN

183


2.1 2.1

Microeconomics of Household Behaviour Monetary Policy and Financial Regulation


Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 E.10.3.

5 5

E E

EN EN

DD MSc Economics-IB&M-IE&B – Fudan University, Shanghai 1 electives FEB - Economics

course title Economic Growth in History Public Economics and Social Policy

Programme:

EBM106A05 EBM107A05


EC 5 5

C/E lang E EN E EN

DD MSc Economics-IB&M-IE&B – Fudan University, Shanghai 2 core programme for students from FEB - Economics

course title Study at Fudan University, Shanghai

code

EC 60

C/E lang C EN

Programme content (for MSc IB&M students from FEB )

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 NB

184

DD MSc Economics-IB&M-IE&B – Fudan University, Shanghai 1 core programme for students from FEB - IB&M

course title core elective IE&B or IB&M Foreign Dir. Investment & Trade (MSc) International Business Strategy (MSc) core electives IE&B or IB&M Research Seminar for IB&M Master’s Thesis IB&M core electives IE&B or IB&M


EBM718B05 EBM719A20

EC 5 5 5 10 5 20 10

C/E lang C EN C EN C EN C EN C C C

EN EN EN

Students choose 15 ECs in core electives FEB - IB&M and 10 ECs in core electives FEB IE&B or core electives in FEB-IB&M which they have not already taken. NB: It is only possible for students to enter part 2 at Fudan in September.



DD MSc Economics-IB&M-IE&B – Fudan University, Shanghai 1 core electives FEB - IB&M



EC 5 5 5 5 5

C/E lang E EN C EN E EN E EN C EN

These courses are core electives in the MSc IB&M programme and electives in the MSc IE&B programme.

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 E.10.4.

DD MSc Economics-IB&M-IE&B – Fudan University, Shanghai 2 core programme for students from FEB - IB&M


code

EC 60

C/E lang C EN

Programme content (for MSc IE&B students of FEB )

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1

DD MSc Economics-IB&M-IE&B – Fudan University, Shanghai 1 core programme for students from FEB - IE&B

course title core elective IE&B or IB&M Foreign Dir. Investment & Trade (MSc) International Business Strategy (MSc) core electives IE&B or IB&M Research Seminar for IE&B Master’s Thesis IE&B core electives IE&B or IB&M

code EBM086A05 EBM088A05 EBM846B05 EBM868A20

EC 5 5 5 10 5 20 10


185


NB

Students choose 15 ECs in core electives FEB - IE&B and 10 ECs in core electives FEB IB&M or core electives in FEB-IE&B which they have not already taken. NB: It is only possible for students to enter part 2 at Fudan in September.

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1 2.1 2.2 NB



EC 5 5 5 5 5 5


These courses are core electives in the MSc IE&B programme and electives in the MSc IB&M programme.


186

DD MSc Economics-IB&M-IE&B – Fudan University, Shanghai 1 core electives FEB - IE&B

DD MSc Economics-IB&M-IE&B – Fudan University, Shanghai 2 core programme for students from FEB - IE&B


code

EC 60

C/E lang C EN


E.11.

DD MSc IFM – UU, Uppsala

E.11.1.


Coördinator: Dr Wim Westerman, [email protected], 050-363 7088 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Key facts Start of programme: Duration (in semesters): Total credits: Language: Type of degree:

Admission:

Application: Tuition fees 2012 - 2013

1 September 3 90 ECs English MSc in International Financial Management (University of Groningen); and MSc in Business and Economics (Uppsala University). Graduates will also receive a diploma supplement on which it is noted that the RUG degree is awarded within the framework of the double degree programme with Uppsala University. The admission requirements for this double degree are the same as those for the MSc International Financial Management at FEBRUG. Please go to: www.rug.nl/howtoapply EEA students € 1,835 tuition fee per year Non EEA students € 13,000 per year All DD students € 3,500 (one-time participation fee)

Programme profile The International Financial Management double degree programme is offered jointly by the University of Groningen in the Netherlands and Uppsala University in Sweden. The double degree programme consists of two one-year master programmes: the Master of Science in International Financial Management (MSc IFM) of the University of Groningen, and the Master of Science in Business and Economics of Uppsala University, Sweden. It has a unique set-up. You take one semester of courses in Groningen, one semester of courses in Uppsala and you must take electives and write one master’s thesis (also one semester), which is supervised by staff members from both universities. The thesis will be part of both Master of Science programmes. By organizing the thesis project in this way, you can effectively study two one-year master programmes in three semesters (i.e. 18 months/90 ECs). These days internationally oriented firms and organizations do not merely need financial specialists who are acquainted with the latest tools and techniques. They are rather looking for professionals who can use these tools and techniques for managing information and business resources. The IFM programme is different from most other Master programmes in international finance because it focuses on managerial aspects of international finance. The curriculum is designed to provide you with the skills you will need to function as a financial manager in an internationally operating firm or organization. It will give you a thorough understanding of the different aspects of financial

187


management in an international business environment, and aims at teaching you to think strategically and to explore how change can be initiated and managed. Programme structure (2013-2015) for students from FEB: DD MSc IFM – UU, Uppsala Master’s Year 1 Semester 1 (FEB)

Semester 2 (UU)

Master’s Year 2 Semester 3 (FEB and/or UU)

30 EC advanced courses FEB

30 EC advanced courses UU

10 EC compulsory courses; 20 EC joint FEB/UU Master Thesis Project

What will you learn? The Master programme in the International Financial Management programme emphasizes the study of the managerial aspects of international financial issues. The curriculum of the MSc IFM is designed to provide students with the skills they will need to operate as a good financial manager in an internationally operating firm or organization. It aims at learning to think strategically, and to explore how one can initiate and manage change. Therefore, the MSc IFM offers students a programme that matches the demand of the market for managers who are able to manage international financial operations. Students graduating from this programme will be able to: Make decisions at strategic level in many different private and public organisations that are internationally oriented. Choose the appropriate analytical techniques for analysing and managing international financial problems. Provide and present relevant information for businesses operating internationally. Apply theory of international finance to practical situations. Carry out and present research findings on issues in international finance. Career prospects International Financial Management (IFM) aims to develop future managers to handle the complexities of foreign capital investments and financing, evaluate risks related to operating abroad, manage and control international production and sales activities, manage alliances with foreign parties, and organise the processing and reporting information. You will be trained for managerial careers in financial organizations as well as in multinational companies as corporate financial managers. As a graduate from this programme you may pursue a career at senior management level in various internationally oriented organizations, such as multinationals and/or international organizations. As a graduate you may also take up research oriented positions or conduct further research for a Ph.D. (with a view to an academic career), although if you wish to pursue an academic career a research master would probably be a better choice.

188


Further information http://www.rug.nl/masters/international-financial-management-dd/ E.11.2.

Programme content

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1-2

course title International Business Strategy (MSc) International Man. Accounting & Control Research Methods in Finance Financial Reporting (MSc) International Corporate Finance International Risk Management study in Uppsala

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 1.1 NB

DD MSc IFM – UU, Uppsala 1 core programme for students from FEB code EBM088A05 EBM662A05 EBM070A05 EBM045A05 EBM098A05 EBM099A05

EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 30


EC 20 10

C/E lang C EN C EN

DD MSc IFM – UU, Uppsala 2 core programme for students from FEB

course title Master’s Thesis IFM electives from selective list

code EBM022A20

Selective list - students may choose electives from the following MSc programmes: MSc Finance, MSc BA O&MC, MSc Economics, MSc EORAS, MSc IE&B and MSc IB&M.

189


E.12.

DD MSc Marketing, profile Marketing Intelligence – BI, Oslo

E.12.1.


Coördinator: Dr J.A. Voerman, [email protected], 050-363 7069 Secretary: Mrs H.G. Tamling, [email protected], 050-363 7065 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Key facts Start of programme: Duration (in semesters): Total credits: Language: Type of degree:

Admission:

Application:


1 September 4 124 ECs English MSc Marketing/profile Marketing Intelligence (University of Groningen); and MSc in Strategic Marketing Management (BI Norwegian Business School, Oslo). Graduates will also receive a diploma supplement on which it is noted that the RUG degree is awarded within the framework of the double degree programme with BI Norwegian Business School. The admission requirements for this double degree are the same as those for the MSc Marketing, profile Marketing Intelligence at FEBRUG and the MSc in Strategic Marketing Management at BI NBS Oslo. All students should have completed semesters 1 and 2 of Year 1 with a GPA of at least 7.2. Selection for Year 2 of the double degree takes place at the home university during semester 2 of Year 1. Only candidates who can demonstrate that satisfactory progress has been made in semester 1 are eligible for the double degree programme. A maximum of 5 RUG and 5 BI students will be admitted to the double degree each year. For students not yet registered at FEB-RUG, please go to: www.rug.nl/howtoapply For students currently registered in Year 1 at FEB-RUG, the application deadline is 1 February A maximum of 5 RUG and 5 BI students will be admitted to the double degree each year. EEA students € 1,835 per year Non EEA students € 13,000 per year An extra participation fee of € 2,330 is required for EEA students for the period spent at the partner university. For more information please visit the DD website.

N.B. You remain enrolled, fee-paying students at the ‘home’ university until you have completed the 124 ECs of the DD programme. If you are a BI student you must also enrol as fee-paying student at RUG in order to be eligible for a Dutch degree certificate. If you are a student with an exchange status you are not eligible for Dutch degree certificates in the Netherlands.

190


Programme profile BI Norwegian Business School, Oslo, Norway and the Faculty of Economics and Business, University of Groningen, the Netherlands, have established a high quality, 2-year Double Degree Master’s programme in Marketing. This is a unique opportunity to expand and deepen your knowledge and expertise in your chosen specialisation field of Marketing, experience a new and challenging research and teaching environment and graduate with two stand-alone Master’s degrees. The double degree MSc in Marketing programme aims to educate market-oriented leaders for the modern economy. In the Groningen programme, the focus is on customer relations and customer insights. Therefore, you learn how to collect data about customers and how to analyse these using the latest and most advanced marketing research methods. The Oslo programme is founded on three pillars: marketing theory, statistical methods and financial implications of marketing investments. Marketing managers oversee the research that provides market knowledge to help guide their decisions on a large number of issues such as which markets to target, which new products to develop, what level of distribution will be most cost efficient, what price will optimize sales and profits, and what communication themes and channels will best build brand value. Practitioners in the field give guest lectures relating theory to real business practice. For all students in this programme, a master’s thesis (20 ECs) will be written in Groningen and a research paper (10 ECs) will written at BI. Programme structure (2012-2014) for students from FEB: DD MSc Marketing/profile Marketing Intelligence – BI, Oslo Master’s Year 1 MSc Marketng, Marketing Intelligence Semester 1 (FEB) Semester 2 (FEB) 30 EC advanced 10 EC advanced courses MSc courses MSc Marketing Marketing /Marketing /Marketing Intelligence track & Intelligence track Master’s Thesis (20 EC)

Master’s Year 2 MSc Strategic Marketing Semester 3 (BI) Semester 4 (BI) 30 EC core & elective 34 EC core & courses MSc elective courses Strategic Marketing MSc Strategic Management Marketing Management, including a Research Paper (10 EC)

for students from BI: DD MSc Marketing/profile Marketing Intelligence – BI, Oslo Master’s Year 1 MSc Strategic Marketing Semester 1 (BI) Semester 2 (BI) 30 EC MSc in 34 EC MSc in Strategic Marketing Strategic Marketing Management Management, including a Research Paper (10 EC)

Master’s Year 2 MSc Marketing, Marketing Intelligence Semester 3 (FEB) Semester 4 (FEB) 30 EC core courses 10 EC core & MSc Marketing, elective courses & specialisation Master’s Thesis (20 Marketing EC) Intelligence

191


What will you learn? Having completed this double degree, you will have: knowledge of traditional and modern marketing techniques and knowledge of basic and advanced marketing research techniques; learned how to collect data about customers and how to analyse these using the latest and most advanced methods for analysing consumer behaviour; learned how to measure financial implications of marketing strategies; knowledge of how movements such as globalization, free-trade agreements, market deregulation, and environmentalism are transforming the marketing environment; and acquired the qualifications to enter PhD programmes and work in international research institutions. Career prospects This double degree programme has been designed for individuals who aspire to a career as market researcher in the private or public sector, as a strategic marketing expert, customs relations manager, product or brand manager, database analyst or market intelligence expert. Graduates qualify for a range of positions in international, multinational or transnational companies. Further information http://www.rug.nl/masters/ddm-strategic-marketing-intelligence/ E.12.2.


C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1 1.1 2.1-2 2.1 NB

192

DD MSc Marketing, profile Marketing Intelligence – BI, Oslo 1 core programme for students from FEB

course title electives A for students from FEB

code

electives B for students from FEB Marketing Research Methods Strategic Marketing for MSc Marketing Master’s Thesis Marketing Consumer Psychology


EC 15

C/E lang C EN

10

C

EN

5 5 20 5

C C C C

EN EN EN EN

Students choose 15 (or 20) ECs from ‘electives A for students from FEB’ (see list) and 10 (or 5) ECs from ‘electives B for students from FEB’ (see list).



course title Marketing Research Practice Marketing Engineering Market Models Customer Models


E.12.3.

code EBM881B05 EBM079A05 EBM077A05 EBM076A05

EC 5 5 5 5


DD MSc Marketing, profile Marketing Intelligence – BI, Oslo 1 electives B for students from FEB



DD MSc Marketing, profile Marketing Intelligence – BI, Oslo 1 electives A for students from FEB


EC 5 5 5 5 5


DD MSc Marketing, profile Marketing Intelligence – BI, Oslo 2 core programme for students from FEB

course title Study at BI, Oslo

code

EC 64

C/E lang C EN

Programme content (for students from BI)


DD MSc Marketing, profile Marketing Intelligence – BI, Oslo 1 core programme for students from Oslo

course title Study at BI, Oslo

code

EC 64

C/E lang C EN

193


Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 + 2.1-2 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 2.1-2 2.1 2.2 NB

course title electives for students from Oslo

code

EC 10

Marketing Research Methods Strategic Marketing for MSc Marketing Marketing Engineering Market Models Master’s Thesis Marketing Consumer Psychology Customer Models

EBM080A05 EBM081B05 EBM079A05 EBM077A05 EBM867B20 EBM074A05 EBM076A05

5 5 5 5 20 5 5

194

C/E lang C EN C C C C C C C


Students choose 10 ECs from ‘electives for students from Oslo’, in consultation with the programme director.


DD MSc Marketing, profile Marketing Intelligence – BI, Oslo 2 core programme for students from Oslo

DD MSc Marketing, profile Marketing Intelligence – BI, Oslo 2 electives for students from Oslo



EC 5 5 5 5 5



E.13.

DD MSc TOM – NUBS, Newcastle

E.13.1.


Director: Mrs Prof. I.F.A. Vis, 050 363 7364, [email protected] Coordinator: Dr J.A.C. Bokhorst, [email protected], 050-363 4693 Secretary: Mrs N. van de Beek, [email protected], 050 363 3921 Study advisor(s): Student Support Desk, http://www.rug.nl/feb/education/support/masterstudent Key facts Start of programme: Duration (in semesters): Total credits: Language: Type of degree:

Admission:

Application:


1 September 3 90 ECs English MSc in Technology and Operations Management (University of Groningen); and MSc in Operations and Supply Chain Management (Newcastle University). Graduates will also receive a diploma supplement on which it is noted that the RUG degree is awarded within the framework of the double degree programme with Newcastle University. For students who apply for the double degree with the RUG, the admission requirements are the same as those for the RUG’s MSc TOM. For students who apply for the double degree with Newcastle University, the entry requirements for the double degree are the same as those for Newcastle University’s MSc in Operations and Supply Chain Management. Students already registered in an undergraduate programme at the RUG that grants direct admission to the MSc TOM programme should submit their applications via the double degree programme coordinator (see the website for the deadline). All other students need to apply with Newcastle University Business School (http://www.ncl.ac.uk/postgraduate/apply/form/) For more information, see: http://www.rug.nl/masters/ddmoperations-management/. EEA students € 6,500 for the 18-month DD programme Non EEA students € 19,000 for the 18-month DD programme

NB If you are a student from an undergraduate programme of the University of Groningen who has direct admission to the MSc Technology and Operations Management (i.e. all FEB bachelor programmes, the Pre-MSc Technology and Operations Management as well as the BSc Industrial Engineering and Management) you may apply for admission to this double degree programme through the procedure described below. You have to submit your application to the coordinator (see the website for the deadline). Application includes: writing a motivation letter; providing a copy of your university marks (results);

195


indicating that you have completed your undergraduate programme or providing evidence that it will be completed before the double degree programme starts; and showing proficiency in mathematics and English through a listing of the grades on relevant courses. All other students need to apply with the Newcastle University Business School. Programme profile The programme enables you to deepen your knowledge and skills in the fields of Operations Management, Technology Management and Supply Chain Management. It provides advanced knowledge and understanding of how to improve business performance and organise competitive advantages in technology-intensive industries. In addition, it enhances the general intellectual development of students, including the improved capacity for enquiry, problem solving, critical thinking and analysis. Programme structure (2013-2015) DD MSc TOM – NUBS, Newcastle Master’s Year 1 Semester 1 (NUBS) Semester 2 (FEB) 30 EC core and 30 EC core and compulsory courses compulsory courses

Master’s Year 2 Semester 3 (FEB and NUBS) 30 EC joint FEB/NUBS Master Thesis Project

What will you learn? Advanced knowledge of operations management in different business environments and cultural contexts as a means of improving organisational performance; The necessary specialist knowledge and skills appropriate to pursue careers in operations management, technology management, supply chain management, general management or consulting; Personal and interpersonal skills, such as report writing, presentation, working in groups, and an appreciation of working in a multicultural environment; Advanced research skills, the ability to critically evaluate and utilise current research, and to make a relevant contribution to organisations and research community. Career prospects As a graduates you are qualified for a wide range of positions, including: Operations Manager; Technology manager; Supply Chain Manager; Consultant in the field of innovation or technology; Project manager for product/process innovations; Positions in industrial and service organizations; or Research-oriented positions.

196


As a graduates you are able to address the need for continuous performance improvement and the quest for efficient resource use in any organisation. Further information http://www.rug.nl/masters/ddm-operations-management/ E.13.2.

Programme content

C = Compulsory; E = Elective; EG = Elective Group; lang = language; EN = English is the language of instruction; NL = Dutch is the language of instruction; see the course description in Ocasys for more details. Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 NB

course title Study at NUBS, Newcastle Asset Management Inventory Management Process Improvement & Quality Control Product & Service Development Behavioural Operations Management Research Methods for TOM Thesis preparation

code EBM024A05 EBM026A05 EBM036A05 EBM760B05 EBM032A05 EBM031A05

EC 30 5 5 5 5 5 5


In semester II b all students participate in the thesis preparation training module, offered in Groningen.

Programme: Year: Profile: sem 1.1-2

DD MSc TOM – NUBS, Newcastle 1 core programme

DD MSc TOM – NUBS, Newcastle 2 core programme

course title Master’s Thesis TOM-DD Newcastle

code EBM028A30

EC 30

C/E lang C EN

197


F.

Substitutie- en overgangsregelingen / Substitution and transition regulations

F.1.

Substitutie- en overgangsregelingen bacheloropleidingen / Substitution and transition regulations Bachelor’s degree programmes

F.1.1.

Algemeen / General

(= BSc-OER bijlage 10.1) 1 Het bachelorprogramma dat ontstaat na toepassing van een substitutieregeling dient te allen tijde tenminste 180 EC te omvatten. Indien dat niet het geval is, dient de student een (of meer) extra keuzevak(ken) af te ronden. 2 Indien een propedeutisch programma na toepassing van een substitutieregeling minder dan 60 EC omvat, wordt de propedeusebul niet eerder uitgereikt dan nadat met het afronden van een (of meer) tweedejaarsvakken de 60 EC-grens is gepasseerd. 3 Een eventueel overschot aan tijdens de propedeuse behaalde EC’s kan gebruikt worden om de vrije keuzeruimte in te vullen. 4 Binnen de substitutieregelingen worden 3 opties onderscheiden: optie 1: het substitutievak verschilt inhoudelijk niet of nauwelijks van het vak uit het oude programma. Wel kunnen naam, vakcode, voertaal of blok gewijzigd zijn. In het geval van een verandering van blok kunnen studenten het substitutievak alleen in het nieuwe blok volgen; ook het (her)tentamen kan alleen in het nieuwe blok worden afgelegd; optie 2: het substitutievak verschilt inhoudelijk (sterk) van het vak uit het oude programma. In dat geval heeft de student de keus om het substitutievak te volgen en daarin ook tentamen af te leggen of hertentamen af te leggen over het vak uit het oude programma. In 2013-2014 wordt hiertoe tweemaal de gelegenheid geboden. De hertentamens voor vakken uit het oude programma worden parallel geroosterd aan de reguliere tentamens voor het substitutievak optie 3: Er is geen substitutievak voor een vak uit het oude programma. In dat geval wordt in 2013-2014 tweemaal de gelegenheid geboden hertentamen af te leggen over het vak uit het oude programma. De tentamenperiodes kunnen afwijken van die in het studiejaar 2012-2013. 5 Studenten die in 2011-2012 of eerder met de opleiding zijn begonnen en per 1 september 2013 nog niet aan alle eisen van de propedeuse hebben voldaan, worden voor de afronding van hun propedeuse verwezen naar de betreffende substitutieregeling in de Onderwijs- en Examenregeling van 2012-2013. 6 De opmerkingen in lid 1-5 van dit artikel zijn van toepassing op de substitutieregelingen van alle bacheloropleidingen. (= BSc OER appendix 10.1) 1 The Bachelor’s programme, after applying a substitution regulation, must at all times comprise at least 180 ECs. Should that not be the case, then a student must complete one (or more) additional elective course(s).

198


2

3 4

5

6

If a propaedeutic programme after the application of a substitution regulation comprises less than 60 ECs, the propaedeutic diploma shall not be awarded until the 60 ECs threshold has been passed by rounding off one (or more) second year courses. A possible surplus of ECs obtained in the propaedeutic phase can be used towards elective courses. Three options can be distinguished in the substitution regulations: option 1: with respect to content, the substitution course does not differ or differs hardly from the course in the old programme. Although, name, course code, language of instruction or semester block may have changed. In case the block has changed students can only take the substitution course in the new block; also the (resit) examination can only be taken in the new block; option 2: the substitution course differs, in respect of content (a lot) from the course in the old programme. In that case, the student has a choice to either take the substitution course and to also take the exam in the substitution course or to take the resit examination of the course in the old programme. In 2013 – 2014 there will be two opportunities to take this resit. The resit examinations for the old programme will be scheduled parallel with the regular examinations of the substitution course; option 3: there is no substitution course replacing a course of the old programme. In that case two resit opportunities will be offered in 2013-2014 for the course of the old programme. The examination periods may deviate from those of the academic year 2012-2013. Students who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the propaedeutic phase per 1 September 2013, are referred to the substitution regulations in Appendix 10 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations of 2012-2013. The notes above, 1-5, apply to the substitution regulations of all bachelor programmes.

F.1.2.

Substitutieregeling BSc Accountancy en Controlling aansluitend op propedeuse Accountancy en Controlling (=E&M/BE)

(= BSc-OER bijlage 10.2) In 2012-2013 is het tweede studiejaar van de bacheloropleiding Accountancy en Controlling aansluitend op de propedeuse Accountancy & Controlling (=E&M/BE) voor het laatst aangeboden. Studenten van de bacheloropleiding Accountancy en Controlling die in 2011-2012 of eerder met de opleiding zijn begonnen en per 1 september 2013 nog niet aan alle eisen van het tweede studiejaar aansluitend op de propedeuse A&C hebben voldaan, dienen ter afronding van hun tweede studiejaar gebruik te maken van de navolgende substitutieregeling:

199


BSc A&C aansluitend op propedeuse A&C (=E&M/BE) - studiejaar 2 substitutieregeling 2013-2014 vak OUDE programma sem. substitutievak(ken) sem. optie (zie bijlage 10.1) (2012-2013) 12-13 2013-2014 13-14 en/of toelichting Bedrijfsk. org.diagn. en 2.1-2 Kwalitatieve 1.2 optie 2 vaardigh. onderzoeksmethoden (EBB606A05) (EBB050A05) Belastingrecht 1 voor Fisc 1.1-2 Belastingrecht 1 voor 1.1-2 optie 1 Ec&Acc Fisc Ec&Acc (RGAFI30103) (RGAFI30103) Belastingrecht 2 1.1-2 Belastingrecht 2 1.1-2 optie 1 (RGMFI00406) (RGMFI00406) Boekhouden II A&C 2.2 Boekhouden A&C 1.2 optie 2 (EBB017A05) (EBB017B05) Business Research 1.2 Business Research 1.2 optie 1 Methods BE/FE/A&C Methods BE/FE/A&C BRM wordt in 13-14 voor (EBB018A05) (EBB018A05) het laatst verzorgd Financiële en Actuariële 2.2 Financiële en Actuariële 1.2 optie 1 en optie 3 Rekenkunde Rekenkunde dit vak “verschuift” van (EBB822A05) (EBB822A05) jaar 2 in het oude naar jaar 3 in het nieuwe programma. Financiering II 2.1 Capital Structure and 2.1 optie 1 BE/FE/A&C (EBB823B05) Financial Planning (EBB060A05) Gedrag in organisaties 1.1 Gedrag in organisaties 1.2 optie 1 A&C (EBB738C05) (EBP607A05) Human Resource 2.1 Human Resource 2.1 optie 1 Management Management B&M (EBB617A05) (EBB617B05) IT-toepassingen A&C 2.1 geen optie 3 (EBB025A03) hertentamens na 2.1 en 2.2 Management Accounting 1.2 Management 1.2 optie 1 BE/FE/A&C Accounting for BE (EBB846B05) (EBB846C05) Micro-economie II 2.1 Microeconomics 1.2 optie 2 (EBB853A05) Industrial Organization (EBB067A05) Organisatieverandering 2.1 Organisatieverandering 2.2 optie 1 (EBB711A05) en leiderschap (EBB711C05) Statistiek II A&C 1.1 Econometrics for BE 2.1 optie 2 (EBB875B03) (EBB061A05) Strategic Management 2.2 Strategic Management 2.2 optie 2 (EBB649B05) B&M (EBB649C05)

200


F.1.3.

Substitutieregeling BSc Accountancy en Controlling na propedeuse Bedrijfskunde

(= BSc-OER bijlage 10.3) In 2012-2013 is het tweede studiejaar van de bacheloropleiding Accountancy en Controlling aansluitend op de propedeuse Bedrijfskunde voor het laatst aangeboden. Studenten van de bacheloropleiding Accountancy en Controlling die in 2011-2012 of eerder met de opleiding zijn begonnen en per 1 september 2013 nog niet aan alle eisen van het tweede studiejaar na de propedeuse Bedrijfskunde hebben voldaan, dienen ter afronding van hun tweede studiejaar gebruik te maken van de navolgende substitutieregeling: BSc A&C na propedeuse Bedrijfskunde - studiejaar 2 substitutieregeling 2013-2014 vak OUDE programma sem. substitutievak(ken) sem. optie (zie bijlage 10.1) (2012-2013) 12-13 2013-2014 13-14 en/of toelichting Bedrijfsk. org.diagn. en 2.1-2 Kwalitatieve 1.2 optie 2 vaardigh. onderzoeksmethoden (EBB606A05) (EBB050A05) Belastingrecht 1 voor Fisc 1.1-2 Belastingrecht 1 voor 1.1-2 optie 1 Ec&Acc Fisc Ec&Acc (RGAFI30103) (RGAFI30103) Belastingrecht 2 1.1-2 Belastingrecht 2 1.1-2 optie 1 (RGMFI00406) (RGMFI00406) Boekhouden 1b A&C 1.2 Geen optie 3 (EBB016A03) Boekhouden II A&C 2.2 Boekhouden A&C 1.2 optie 2 (EBB017A05) (EBB017B05) Financieel beleid A&C 1.1 Financial Management 1.1 optie 1 (EBB675A05) BDK (EBB046A05) Financiële en Actuariële 2.2 Financiële en Actuariële 1.2 optie 1 en optie 3 Rekenkunde Rekenkunde dit vak “verschuift” van (EBB822A05) (EBB822A05) jaar 2 in het oude naar jaar 3 in het nieuwe programma. Financiering II 2.1 Capital Structure and 2.1 optie 1 BE/FE/A&C (EBB823B05) Financial Planning (EBB060A05) Management Accounting 1.2 Management 1.2 optie 1 BE/FE/A&C Accounting for BE (EBB846B05) (EBB846C05) Marketing A&C 2.1 Marketing BDK 1.1 optie 1 (EBB640A05) (EBP027A05) Omgevingsanalyse 1.1 Organisatie en 2.2 optie 2 (EBB641A05) omgeving (EBP028A05) Operations Management 1.2 Operations 1.2 optie 2 (EBB644A05) Management B&M/TM (EBB644B05)

201


Statistiek II A&C (EBB875B03) Strategic Management (EBB649B05)

F.1.4.

1.1 2.2

Econometrics for BE (EBB061A05) Strategic Management B&M (EBB649C05)

2.1

optie 2

2.2

optie 2

Substitutieregeling BSc Bedrijfseconomie

(= BSc-OER bijlage 10.4) In 2012-2013 is het tweede studiejaar van de bacheloropleiding Bedrijfseconomie voor het laatst aangeboden. Studenten van de bacheloropleiding Bedrijfseconomie die in 2011-2012 of eerder met de opleiding zijn begonnen en per 1 september 2013 nog niet aan alle eisen van het tweede studiejaar hebben voldaan, dienen ter afronding van hun tweede studiejaar gebruik te maken van de navolgende substitutieregeling: BSc Bedrijfseconomie - studiejaar 2 - substitutieregeling 2013-2014 vak OUDE programma sem. substitutievak(ken) sem. optie (zie bijlage 10.1) (2012-2013) 12-13 2013-2014 13-14 en/of toelichting Business & ICT BE 2.2 Informatiemanagement 2.1 optie 2 (EBB808B05) BDK (EBP024A05) Business Research 1.2 Business Research 1.2 optie 1; Methods BE/FE/A&C Methods BE/FE/A&C BRM wordt in 13-14 voor (EBB018A05) (EBB018A05) het laatst verzorgd Engels BE 2.1-2 English Course for 1.1-2 optie 1 (EBB021A05) Business Admin. of (EBB614B05) 2.1-2 Financiering II 2.1 Capital Structure and 2.1 optie 1 BE/FE/A&C (EBB823B05) Financial Planning (EBB060A05) IT-toepassingen BE 2.1-2 geen optie 3; (EBB026A05) hertentamens ná 2.1 en 2.2 Management Accounting 1.2 Management 1.2 optie 1 BE/FE/A&C Accounting for BE (EBB846B05) (EBB846C05) Marketing II BE 2.2 Marktcontext en 2.2 optie 2 (EBB849A05) marktonderzoek (EBB055A05) Micro-economie II 2.1 Microeconomics 1.2 optie 1 (EBB853A05) Industrial Organization (EBB067A05) Openbare Financiën 1.1 Public Finance 1.2 optie 2 (EBB856A05) (EBB861A05) Statistiek II BE 1.1 Econometrics for BE 2.1 optie 2 (EBB875B05) (EBB061A05) Strategisch Management 1.1 Strategic Management 2.2 optie 2 BE (EBB843B05) B&M (EBB649C05)

202


Wiskunde II BE (EBB890B05)

F.1.5.

1.2

Matrix Analysis and Optimization (EBB066A05)

1.1

optie 2

Substitutie- en overgangsregelingen BSc Bedrijfskunde

(= BSc-OER bijlage 10.5) Studenten van de bacheloropleiding Bedrijfskunde die in 2011-2012 of eerder met de opleiding zijn begonnen en per 1 september 2013 nog niet aan alle eisen van het (toenmalige) tweede studiejaar hebben voldaan, dienen ter afronding van hun tweede studiejaar gebruik te maken van de navolgende substitutieregeling: BSc Bedrijfskunde - studiejaar 2 - substitutieregeling 2013-2014 vak OUDE programma sem. substitutievak(ken) sem. optie (zie bijlage 10.1) (2012-2013) 12-13 2013-2014 13-14 en/of toelichting Financieel beleid 1.1 Financial Management 1.1 optie 1 Bedrijfskunde BDK (EBB615A05) ( EBB046A05) Human Resource 2.1 Human Resource 2.1 optie 1 Management Management B&M (EBB617A05) ( EBB617B05) Informatiemanagement 1.2 Informatiemanagement 2.1 optie 1 (EBB727B05) BDK eerstejaarsvak (EBP024A05) Management Accounting 2.2 Accounting for 1.2 optie 1 and Control Management Control (EBB636A05) (EBB078A05) Marketing Bedrijfskunde 1.1 Marketing BDK 1.1 optie 2 (EBB639A05) (EBP027A05) eerstejaarsvak Omgevingsanalyse 1.1 Organisatie en 2.2 optie 1 (EBB641A05) omgeving eerstejaarsvak (EBP028A05) Operations Management 1.2 Operations 1.2 optie 2 (EBB644A05) Management BDK/TM ( EBB644B05) Organisatieverandering 2.1 Organisatieverandering 2.2 optie 1 (EBB711A05) en Leiderschap ( EBB711C05) Practicum I 1.2 geen overleg met de Bedrijfskunde practicum-coördinator (EBB725A05) over afronding Practicum II 2.1 geen overleg met de Bedrijfskunde practicum-coördinator (EBB726A05) over afronding Practicum III 2.2 geen overleg met de Bedrijfskunde practicum-coördinator (EBB729A05) over afronding Strategic Management 2.2 Strategic Management 2.2 optie 2 (EBB649B05) B&M ( EBB649C05)

203


F.1.6.

Overgangsregeling BSc Bedrijfskunde, profiel Accountancy en Controlling

(= BSc OER appendix 10.6) Studenten van de bacheloropleiding Bedrijfskunde, profiel Accountancy & Controlling die het nieuwe programma van de opleiding volgen, maar reeds vakken uit (het) oude programma(‘s) hebben afgerond, kunnen gebruik maken van onderstaande overgangsregeling: BSc Bedrijfskunde, profiel A&C - studiejaar 2 - overgangsregeling 2013-2014 vak NIEUWE programma sem. vak(ken) oude programma(‘s) die (indien afgerond) het (2013-2014) 13-14 nieuwe vak mogen vervangen Financial Management 1.1 Financieel beleid A&C (EBB675A05) BDK (EBB046A05) of Financieel beleid Bedrijfskunde (EBB615A05) of Financial Management for TM (EBB751B05) of Financiering I BE/FE/A&C (EBP805A05) Internal Control (BSc) 1.1 geen (EBB048A05) Kwantitatieve 1.1 Onderzoeksmethoden I Bedrijfskunde onderzoeksmethoden (EBP616A05) (EBB051A05) of Business Research Methods BE/FE/A&C (EBB018A05) Accounting for 1.2 Management Accounting and Control Management Control (EBB636A05) (EBB078A05) of Management Accounting BE/FE/A&C (EBB846B05) NB Deze vakken mogen dienen als vervanging voor of het nieuwe eerstejaarsvak Management Accounting BDK (EBP026A05) of het nieuwe tweedejaarsvak Accounting for Management Control (EB078A05) Boekhouden A&C 1.2 Boekhouden Ib A&C (EBB016A03) (EBB017B05) en Boekhouden II A&C (EBB017A05) Kwalitatieve 1.2 Onderzoeksmethoden II Bedrijfskunde onderzoeksmethoden (EBP625A04) (onder voorbehoud van (EBB050A05) mogelijkheid tot wegwerken puntdeficiëntie) of Bedrijfsk. org.diagn. en vaardigh. (EBB606A05) Financial Reporting and 2.1 Boekhouden II A&C (EBB017A05) Consolidation (EBB047A05) Ontwerpmethodologie 2.1 Methoden en technieken ontwerpger.onderz. (EBB052A05) (EBP606B05) Recht BDK (EBB053A05) 2.1 Juridische grondslagen Bedrijfskunde (EBP613A04) (onder voorbehoud van mogelijkheid tot wegwerken puntdeficiëntie) of Juridische grondslagen BE/FE/A&C (EBP004B05) of Bedrijfsrecht (EBB607A05 Advanced Financial 2.2 geen Accounting (EBB045A05) Financiering A&C 2.2 Financiering II BE/FE/A&C (EBB823B05) (EBB823C05)

204


Introduction to Auditing (EBB049A05)

F.1.7.

2.2

geen

Overgangsregeling BSc Bedrijfskunde, profiel Business en Management

(= BSc OER appendix 10.7) Studenten van de bacheloropleiding Bedrijfskunde, profiel Business & Management die het nieuwe programma van de opleiding volgen, maar reeds vakken uit (het) oude programma(‘s) hebben afgerond, kunnen gebruik maken van onderstaande overgangsregeling: BSc Bedrijfskunde, profiel B&M - studiejaar 2 - overgangsregeling 2013-2014 vak NIEUWE programma sem. vak(ken) oude programma(‘s) die (indien afgerond) het (2013-2014) 13-14 nieuwe vak mogen vervangen Financial Management 1.1 Financieel beleid A&C (EBB675A05) BDK (EBB046A05) of Financieel beleid Bedrijfskunde (EBB615A05) of Financial Management for TM (EBB751B05) of Financiering I BE/FE/A&C (EBP805A05) Kwantitatieve 1.1 Onderzoeksmethoden I Bedrijfskunde onderzoeksmethoden (EBP616A05) (EBB051A05) of Business Research Methods BE/FE/A&C (EBB018A05) Management- en 1.1 Organisatie en managementtheorie (EBP626B05) Organisatietheorie (EBB054A05) Kwalitatieve 1.2 Onderzoeksmethoden II Bedrijfskunde onderzoeksmethoden (EBP625A04) (onder voorbehoud van (EBB050A05) mogelijkheid tot wegwerken puntdeficiëntie) of Bedrijfsk. org.diagn. en vaardigh. (EBB606A05) Accounting for 1.2 Management Accounting and Control Management Control (EBB636A05) (EBB078A05) of Management Accounting BE/FE/A&C (EBB846B05) NB Deze vakken mogen dienen als vervanging voor of het nieuwe eerstejaarsvak Management Accounting BDK (EBP026A05) of het nieuwe tweedejaarsvak Accounting for Management Control (EB078A05) Operations Management 1.2 Operations Management (EBB644A05) B&M/TM (EBB644B05) Human Resource 2.1 Human Resource Management (EBB617A05) Management B&M (EBB617B05) Ontwerpmethodologie 2.1 Methoden en technieken ontwerpger.onderz. (EBB052A05) (EBP606B05) Recht BDK (EBB053A05) 2.1 Juridische grondslagen Bedrijfskunde (EBP613A04) (onder voorbehoud van mogelijkheid tot wegwerken puntdeficiëntie) of Juridische grondslagen BE/FE/A&C (EBP004B05) of Bedrijfsrecht (EBB607A05

205


Marktcontext en 2.2 marktonderzoek (EBB055A05) Organisatieverandering en 2.2 Leiderschap (EBB711C05) Strategic Management 2.2 B&M (EBB649C05)

F.1.8.

Practicum I Bedrijfskunde (EBB725A05)

Organisatieverandering (EBB711A05)

of

Strategic Management (EBB649B05) Strategisch Management BE (EBB843B05)

Overgangsregeling BSc Bedrijfskunde, profiel Technology Management

(= BSc OER appendix 10.8) Studenten van de bacheloropleiding Bedrijfskunde, profiel Technology Management die het nieuwe programma van de opleiding volgen, maar reeds vakken uit (het) oude programma(‘s) hebben afgerond, kunnen gebruik maken van onderstaande overgangsregeling: BSc Bedrijfskunde, profiel TM - studiejaar 2 - overgangsregeling 2013-2014 vak NIEUWE programma sem. vak(ken) oude programma(‘s) die (indien afgerond) het (2013-2014) 13-14 nieuwe vak mogen vervangen Financial Management 1.1 Financieel beleid A&C (EBB675A05) BDK (EBB046A05) of Financieel beleid Bedrijfskunde (EBB615A05) of Financial Management for TM (EBB751B05) of Financiering I BE/FE/A&C (EBP805A05) Kwantitatieve 1.1 Onderzoeksmethoden I Bedrijfskunde onderzoeksmethoden (EBP616A05) (EBB051A05) of Business Research Methods BE/FE/A&C (EBB018A05) Technologiemanagement 1.1 Inleiding discrete technologie ((EBP608A05) (EBB059A05) Kwalitatieve 1.2 Onderzoeksmethoden II Bedrijfskunde onderzoeksmethoden (EBP625A04) (onder voorbehoud van (EBB050A05) mogelijkheid tot wegwerken puntdeficiëntie) of Bedrijfsk. org.diagn. en vaardigh. (EBB606A05) Logistieke 1.2 geen informatiesystemen (EBB057A05) Operations Management 1.2 Operations Management (EBB644A05) B&M/TM (EBB644B05) Ontwerpmethodologie 2.1 Methoden en technieken ontwerpger.onderz (EBP606B05) (EBB052A05) Recht BDK (EBB053A05) 2.1 Juridische grondslagen Bedrijfskunde (EBP613A04) (onder voorbehoud van mogelijkheid tot wegwerken puntdeficiëntie) of Juridische grondslagen BE/FE/A&C (EBP004B05) of Bedrijfsrecht (EBB607A05 Work Organization and 2.1 Work Organization and Job Design (EBB601B05) Job Design (EBB601B05)

206


Applied Manufacturing Research (EBB056A05) Management of Product Innovation (EBB652B05) Production Planning & Quality Control (EBB058A05)

F.1.9.

2.2

Applied Manufacturing Management (TBAMM05E)

2.2

Management of Product Innovation (EBB652B05

2.2

Production Organization and Control (EBB650B05)

Substitution and transition regulations BSc Econometrics and Operations Research

(= BSc OER appendix 10.9) Students in the bachelor programme Econometrics and Operations Research, who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the (old) second year per 1 September 2013 must make use of the following substitution regulation to round off their second year: BSc EOR - year 2 - substitution regulation 2013-2014 course in OLD sem. substitution course(s) sem. option (see 10.1) and/or programme (2012-2013) 12-13 (2013-2014) 13-14 explanation Difference- & Differential 1.2 Difference- & 1.2 option 1 Equations (EBB812A05) Differential Equations (EBB812A05) Finance Theory and 2.1 none option 3 Modelling (EBB825A05) Introduction to Actuarial 2.2 Introduction to 2.1 option 1 Science Actuarial Science (EBB827A05) (EBB827A05) Introduction to 2.2 Introduction to 2.1 option 1 Econometrics Econometrics (EBB828A05) (EBB828A05) Introduction to 2.1 Introduction to 2.2 option 1 Mathematical Economics Mathematical (EBB830A05) Economics (EBB830A05) Introduction to 1.2 Introduction to 1.2 option 1 Operations Research Operations Research (EBB829A05) (EBB829A05) Linear Algebra and 1.1 Matrices, Graphs and 1.1 option 2; Convexity Convexity (EBB073A05) in this case, Linear (EBB851B05) and Algebra for EOR Linear Algebra for EOR (EBP037A05) counts as (EBP037A05) 2.2 3rd-year elective Macroeconomics I for 1.2 Macroeconomics for 1.1 option 1 EOR (EBB027A05) EOR (EBB027B05) Programming I for EOR 1.1 Programming for EOR 2.1 option 2 (EBB859A05) (EBP039A05)

207


Programming II for EOR (EBB860A05) Statistics IIa for EOR (EBB876A05) Statistics IIb for EOR (EBB877A05)

2.2

none

1.1

Statistical Inference (EBB075A05) Linear Models in Statistics (EBB072A05)

2.1

option 3 1.1

option 1

1.2

option 1

Students of the bachelor programme Econometrics and Operations Research who are taking the new programme, and who have already rounded off courses from the old programme(s) can make use of the transition regulation below: BSc EOR - year 2 - transition regulation 2013-2014 course NEW programme sem. course(s) of old programme(s) that (if completed) may (2013-2014) 13-14 replace the new course Macroeconomics for EOR 1.1 Macroeconomics I for EOR (EBB027A05) (EBB027B05) Matrices, Graphs and 1.1 Linear Algebra and Convexity (EBB851B05) Convexity (EBB073A05) Statistical Inference 1.1 Statistics IIa for EOR (EBB876A05) (EBB075A05) Difference- & Differential 1.2 Difference- & Differential Equations (EBB812A05) Equations (EBB812A05) Introduction to Operations 1.2 Introduction to Operations Research (EBB829A05) Research (EBB829A05) Linear Models in Statistics 1.2 Statistics IIb for EOR (EBB877A05) (EBB072A05) Introduction to Actuarial 2.1 Introduction to Actuarial Science (EBB827A05) Science (EBB827A05) Introduction to 2.1 Introduction to Econometrics (EBB828A05) Econometrics (EBB828A05) Queueing Theory and 2.1 none Simulation (EBB074A05) Dynamic Econometrics (for 2.2 Dynamic Econometrics (for EOR year 3) (EBB813A07) EOR year 2) (EBB813A05) Introduction to 2.2 Introduction to Mathematical Economics (EBB830A05) Mathematical Economics (EBB830A05) Risk Insurance (for EOR 2.2 Risk Insurance (for EOR year 3) (EBB863A07) year 2) (EBB863A05)

F.1.10.

Substitution and transition regulations BSc Economics and Business Economics, profile Economics

(= BSc OER appendix 10.10) Students in the bachelor programme Economics and Business Economics, profile Economics who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the (old) second year per 1 September 2013 must make use of the following substitution regulation to round off their second year:

208


BSc E&BE, profile Economics - year 2 - substitution regulation 2013-2014 course in OLD sem. substitution course(s) sem. option (see 10.1) and/or programme (2012-2013) 12-13 2013-2014 13-14 explanation Applied Public Finance & 2.2 none option 3; Economic Policy substitute course in (EBB015A05) consultation with the programme coordinator. Econometrics for 2.1 Econometrics for 2.1 option 1 Economics (EBB814A05) Economics (EBB814A05) Empirical Research Paper 2.2 Empirical Research 2.2 option 1 (EBB020A05) Paper for Economics (EBB020B05) Finance II for E&BE 2.1 Capital Structure and 2.1 option 1 (EBB818A05) Financial Planning (EBB060A05) Growth, Institutions and 1.2 Growth, Institutions 2.1 option 1 Business (EBB022A05) and Business (EBB022A05) International Economics 2.1 Foreign Dir. Investment 1.1 option 1; IIa for E&BE & Trade for E&BE a grade obtained for an IE (EBB003B05) (EBB064A05) IIa assignment (SGT grade) remains valid for the substitute course. International Economics 2.2 Economics of Banking 2.2 option 2; IIb for E&BE (EBB062A05) those who failed the IE (EBB834B05) IIb assignment (SGT grade) must take the substitute course. International Industrial 1.2 Microeconomics 1.2 option 1 Economics Industrial Organization (EBB836A05) (EBB067A05) Macroeconomics II 1.1 International 1.1 option 2 (EBB841A05 Macroeconomics (EBB841B05) Mathematics IIa for 1.1 Matrix Analysis and 1.1 option 2 Economics (EBB932A05) Optimization (EBB066A05) Mathematics IIb for 1.2 Intermediate 1.2 option 1 Economics (EBB933A05) Mathematics (EBB933B05) Public Finance 1.1 Public Finance 1.2 option 2 (EBB861A05) (EBB861A05)

Students of the bachelor programme Economics and Business Economics, profile Economics who are taking the new programme, and who have already rounded off courses from the old programme(s) can make use of the transition regulation below:

209


BSc E&BE, profile Economics - year 2 - transition regulation 2013-2014 course NEW programme sem. course(s) of old programme(s) that (if completed) may (2013-2014) 13-14 replace the new course Foreign Dir. Investment & 1.1 International Economics IIa for E&BE (EBB003B05) Trade for E&BE (EBB064A05) International 1.1 International Economics IIb for E&BE Macroeconomics (EBB834B05) (EBB841B05) or Macroeconomics II (EBB841A05) Matrix Analysis and 1.1 Mathematics IIa for Economics (EBB932A05) Optimization (EBB066A05) Intermediate Mathematics 1.2 Mathematics IIb for Economics (EBB933A05) (EBB933B05) Microeconomics 1.2 International Industrial Economics (EBB836A05) Industrial Organization (EBB067A05) Public Finance 1.2 Public Finance (EBB861A05) (EBB861A05) Capital Structure and 2.1 Finance II for E&BE (EBB818A05) Financial Planning (EBB060A05) Econometrics for 2.1 Econometrics for Economics (EBB814A05) Economics (EBB814A05) Growth, Institutions and 2.1 Growth, Institutions and Business (EBB022A05) Business (EBB022A05) Economics of Banking 2.2 International Economics IIb for E&BE (EBB834B05) (EBB062A05) Empirical Research Paper 2.2 Empirical Research Paper (EBB020A05) for Economics (EBB020B05) History of Economic 2.2 History of Economic Thought (EBB934A05) Thought (EBB934A05)

F.1.11.

Substitution and transition regulations BSc Economics and Business Economics, profile IE&B

(= BSc-OER bijlage 10.11) Students in the bachelor programme Economics and Business Economics, profile IE&B who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the (old) second year per 1 September 2013 must make use of the following substitution regulation to round off their second year:

210


BSc E&BE, profile IE&B - year 2 - substitution regulation 2013-2014 course in OLD sem. substitution course(s) sem. option (see 10.1) and/or programme (2012-2013) 12-13 2013-2014 13-14 explanation Economics of Strategy 2.2 none 2.2 option 3; (EBB019A05) substitute course in consultation with the programme coordinator; In 2014-2015 the new third-year course Economic Organization Theory can be taken as a substitute course. Finance II for E&BE 2.1 Capital Structure and 2.1 option 1 (EBB818A05) Financial Planning (EBB060A05) Global Development 1.1 Global Development 1.2 option 1 Studies Studies (EBB921B05) (EBB921B05) Growth, Institutions and 1.2 Growth, Institutions 2.1 option 1 Business and Business (EBB022A05) (EBB022A05) International Business 1.2 International Business 1.2 option 1; Strategy (BSc) Strategy for IE&B a grade obtained for an (EBB023A05) (EBB023B05) International Business Strategy (BSc) (EBB023A05) assignment remains valid for the substitution course Business Strategy for IE&B (EBB023B05) International Economics 2.1 Foreign Dir. Investment 1.1 option 1 IIa for E&BE (EBB003B05) & Trade for E&BE a grade obtained for an IE (EBB064A05) IIa assignment (SGT grade) remains valid for the substitute course International Economics 2.2 Economics of 2.2 option 2; IIb for E&BE Banking those who failed the IE (EBB834B05) (EBB062A05) IIb assignment (SGT or International 1.1 grade) must take the Macroeconomics substitute course. (EBB841B05) International Industrial 1.2 Microeconomics 1.2 option 1 Economics (EBB836A05) Industrial Organization (EBB067A05) Mathematics II for IE&B 1.1 Matrix Analysis and 1.1 option 1 (EBB897B05) Optimization (EBB066A05)

211


Research Methods II for IE&B (EBB028A05)

2.1-2

Empirical Research Paper for IE&B (EBB071A05)

2.2

Spanish for IE&B/IB&M (EBB894B05)

2.1-2

none

2.1

Statistics II for IE&B (EBB874B05)

1.1

Econometrics for IE&B (EBB070A05)

2.1

option 2; students who have not rounded off Research Methods II for IE & B in 2013-2-13 must take Empirical Research Paper for IE&B in 2013-2014. It is recommended to attend the lectures on Econometrics for IE&B by way of preparation. option 3; the presentation and portfolio components must have been rounded off in 2012-2013; should this not be the case then a substitute course must be taken after consultation with the programme coordinator. option 2; Econometrics for IE&B must be taken in case a passmark for the assignment for Statistics II for IE&B was not obtained.

Students of the bachelor programme Economics and Business Economics, profile IE&B who are taking the new programme, and who have already rounded off courses from the old programme(s) can make use of the transition regulation below: BSc E&BE, profile IE&B - year 2 - transition regulation 2013-2014 course NEW programme sem. course(s) of old programme(s) that (if completed) may (2013-2014) 13-14 replace the new course Foreign Dir. Investment & 1.1 International Economics IIa for E&BE (EBB003B05) Trade for E&BE (EBB064A05) International 1.1 International Economics IIb for E&BE (EBB834B05) Macroeconomics (EBB841B05) Matrix Analysis and 1.1 Mathematics II for IE&B (EBB897B05) Optimization (EBB066A05) Global Development 1.2 Global Development Studies (EBB921B05) Studies (EBB921B05) International Business 1.2 International Business Strategy (BSc) (EBB023A05) Strategy for IE&B (EBB023B05)

212


Microeconomics Industrial Organization (EBB067A05) Capital Structure and Financial Planning (EBB060A05) Econometrics for IE&B (EBB070A05) Growth, Institutions and Business (EBB022A05) Economics of Banking (EBB062A05) Empirical Research Paper for IE&B (EBB071A05) Philosophy and Ethics of Business (EBB069A05)

F.1.12.

1.2

International Industrial Economics (EBB836A05)

2.1

Finance II for E&BE (EBB818A05)

2.1

Statistics II for IE&B (EBB874B05)

2.1

Growth, Institutions and Business (EBB022A05)

2.2

International Economics IIb for E&BE (EBB834B05)

2.2

Research Methods II for IE&B (EBB028A05)

2.2

In consultation with the programme director using a course from the old programme as a substitute course can be considered.

Transition regulation BSc Economics and Business Economics, profile Business Economics

(= BSc-OER bijlage 10.12) Students of the bachelor programme Economics and Business Economics, profile Business Administration who are taking the new programme, and who have already rounded off courses from the old program(s) can make use of the transition regulation below: BSc E&BE, profile BE - year 2 - transition regulation 2013-2014 course NEW programme sem. course(s) of old programme(s) that (if completed) may (2013-2014) 13-14 replace the new course Foreign Dir. Investment & 1.1 none Trade for E&BE (EBB064A05) International 1.1 none Macroeconomics (EBB841B05) Matrix Analysis and 1.1 none Optimization (EBB066A05) Management Accounting 1.2 Management Accounting BE/FE/A&C (EBB846B05) for BE (EBB846C05) Microeconomics 1.2 none Industrial Organization (EBB067A05) Operations and Logistics 1.2 Operations Management BE/FE/A&C Management (EBB068A05) (EBP005B05) or Operations Management (EBB644A05) Capital Structure and 2.1 Financiering II BE/FE/A&C (EBB823B05) Financial Planning (EBB060A05)

213


Econometrics for BE (EBB061A05) Human Resource Management for BE (EBB065A05) Economics of Banking (EBB062A05) Empirical Research Paper for BE (EBB063A05) Philosophy and Ethics of Business (EBB069A05)

F.1.13.

2.1

none

2.1

Human Resource Management (EBB617A05)

2.2

none

2.2

none

2.2

none

Substitutieregeling BSc Fiscale Economie

(= BSc-OER bijlage 10.13) In 2012-2013 is het tweede studiejaar van de bacheloropleiding Fiscale Economie voor het laatst aangeboden. Studenten van de bacheloropleiding Fiscale Economie die in 2011-2012 of eerder met de opleiding zijn begonnen en per 1 september 2013 nog niet aan alle eisen van het tweede studiejaar hebben voldaan, dienen ter afronding van hun tweede studiejaar gebruik te maken van de navolgende substitutieregeling: BSc Fiscale Economie - studiejaar 2 - substitutieregeling 2013-2014 vak OUDE programma sem. substitutievak(ken) sem. optie (zie bijlage 10.1) (2012-2013) 12-13 2013-2014 13-14 en/of toelichting Belastingrecht 1 voor Fisc 1.1-2 Belastingrecht 1 voor 1.1-2 optie 1; Ec&Acc Fisc Ec&Acc vak wordt ook verzorgd (RGAFI30103) (RGAFI30103) in 2013-2014. Financiering II 2.1 Capital Structure and 2.1 optie 1 BE/FE/A&C (EBB823B05) Financial Planning (EBB060A05) Financiële en Actuariële 2.2 Financiële en Actuariële 1.2 optie 1 Rekenkunde Rekenkunde vak wordt ook verzorgd (EBB822A05) (EBB822A05) in 2013-2014. Fiscaal Comptabele 2.1 Fiscaal Comptabele 2.1 optie 1; Verantwoording 1 Verantwoording 1 vak wordt ook verzorgd (RGBFI00504) (RGBFI00504) in 2013-2014. Formeel Belastingrecht 1 1.1-2 Formeel Belastingrecht 1.1-2 optie 1; (RGBFI00106) 1 vak wordt ook verzorgd (RGBFI00106) in 2013-2014. Inkomstenbelasting 2.1-2 Inkomstenbelasting 2.1-2 optie 1; (RGBFI00108) (RGBFI00108) vak wordt ook verzorgd in 2013-2014. Management Accounting 1.2 Management 1.2 optie 1 BE/FE/A&C Accounting for BE (EBB846B05) (EBB846C05) Ondernemingsrecht 1.1 Ondernemingsrecht 1.1 optie 1 A&C/FE (EBB901B05) A&C/FE (EBB901B05) vak wordt ook verzorgd in 2013-2014.

214


Successiewet voor Fiscalisten (RGBFI00304)

2.2

Vermogensrecht (EBB889A05) Winst (RGBFI00207)

F.1.14.

2.2

1.1

Successiewet voor Fiscalisten (RGBFI00304) geen

optie 1; vak wordt ook verzorgd in 2013-2014. optie 3

2.1-2

Winst (RGBFI00207)

2.1-2

optie 1; vak wordt ook verzorgd in 2013-2014.

Substitution and transition regulations BSc International Business

(= BSc OER appendix 10.14) Students in the bachelor programme International Business, who began their studies in 2010-2011 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the second year per 1 September 2013 are referred to the substitution regulation in Appendix 10 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations of 2012-2013. In addition, the following substitution regulation is applicable: BSc International Business - year 2 - additional substitution regulation 2013-2014 course in OLD sem. substitution course(s) sem. option (see 10.1) and/or programme (2012-2013) 12-13 2013-2014 13-14 explanation History of Globalization 1.2 Global Business History 1.2 option 1 (EBB038A05) (EBB038B05) International Relations & 2.2 Global Political 2.2 option 1 European Integration Economy (EBB039B05) (EBB039A05)

Students in the bachelor programme International Business, who began their studies in 2010-2011 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the (old) third year per 1 September 2013 must make use of the following substitution regulation: BSc International Business - year 3 - substitution regulation 2013-2014 course in OLD sem. substitution course(s) sem. 13- option (see 10.1) and/or programme (2012-2013) 12-13 2013-2014 14 explanation Bachelor’s Thesis IB 2.1-2 Bachelor’s Thesis IB 2.1-2 option 1 (EBB737B10) (EBB737B10) International Financial 2.2 International Financial 2.2 option 1 Management Management (or 1.2) (EBB627A05) (EBB627A05) International Strategic 2.1 International Strategic 2.1 option 1 Management Management (or 1.1) (EBB628A05) (EBB628A05)

215


Managing Int. Business Organizations (EBB638A10)

2.1-2

Managing Intern. Bus. Organizations Game (EBB638B05) and Empirical Research Project for IB (EBB044A05)

2.2 (or 1.2)

option 2

2.1 (or 1.1)

Students of the bachelor programme International Business who are taking the new programme, and who have already rounded off courses from the old program(s) can make use of the transition regulation below: BSc International Business - year 3 - transition regulation 2013-2014 course NEW programme sem. 13- course(s) of old program(s) that (if completed) may (2013-2014) 14 replace the new course International Strategic 2.1 International Strategic Management (EBB628A05) Management (or 1.1) (EBB628A05) International Financial 2.2 International Financial Management (EBB627A05) Management (or 1.2) (EBB627A05) Managing Intern. Bus. 2.2 Managing Int. Business Organizations (EBB638A10) Organizations Game (or 1.2) (EBB638B05) and Empirical Research Project 2.1 for IB (EBB044A05) (or 1.1)

F.1.15.

Substitutieregeling BSc Technologiemanagement, profiel Discrete Technologie

(= BSc-OER bijlage 10.15) In 2012-2013 is het tweede studiejaar van de bacheloropleiding Technologiemanagement voor het laatst aangeboden. Studenten van de bacheloropleiding Technologiemanagement, profiel Discrete Technologie die in 20112012 of eerder met de opleiding zijn begonnen en per 1 september 2013 nog niet aan alle eisen van het tweede studiejaar hebben voldaan, dienen ter afronding van hun tweede studiejaar gebruik te maken van de navolgende substitutieregeling: BSc Technologiemanagement, profiel Discrete Technologie - studiejaar 2 substitutieregeling 2013-2014 vak OUDE programma sem. substitutievak(ken) sem. optie (zie bijlage 10.1) (2012-2013) 12-13 2013-2014 13-14 en/of toelichting Financial Management 2.2 Financial Management 1.1 optie 1 for TM (EBB751B05) BDK (EBB046A05) Management Accounting 2.2 Accounting for 1.2 optie 1 and Control Management Control (EBB636A05) (EBB078A05)

216


Marketing Bedrijfskunde 1.1 (EBB639A05) Mechanica voor TBK/TM 1.1 (NAMECH05E) Operations Research 1 (EBB857A05) Organisatie en technologie II (EBB646A05) Productie technieken (TBPRTE-12)) Production Organization and Control (EBB650B05) Wiskunde 2 voor TM (WIW2TM-03)

1.2

Work Organization and Job Design (EBB601B05)

2.1

F.1.16.

1.2

1.2 2.1

1.1

Marketing BDK (EBP027A05) Mechanica voor TBK/TM (NAMECH05E) Operations Research 1 (EBB857A05) Organisatie en omgeving (EBP028A05) Productie technieken (TBPRTE-12) Production Planning & Quality Control (EBB058A05) Matrix Analysis and Optimization (EBB066A05) Work Organization and Job Design (EBB601B05)

1.1

optie 2

1.1

optie 1

1.2

optie 1

2.2

optie 2

1.2

optie 1

2.2

optie 2

1.1

optie 1

2.1

optie 1

Substitutieregeling BSc Technologiemanagement, profiel Informatietechnologie

(= BSc-OER bijlage 10.16) In 2012-2013 is het tweede studiejaar van de bacheloropleiding Technologiemanagement voor het laatst aangeboden. Studenten van de bacheloropleiding Technologie¬management, profiel Informatietechnologie die in 2011-2012 of eerder met de opleiding zijn begonnen en per 1 september 2013 nog niet aan alle eisen van het tweede studiejaar hebben voldaan, dienen ter afronding van hun tweede studiejaar gebruik te maken van de navolgende substitutieregeling: BSc Technologiemanagement, profiel Informatietechnologie - studiejaar 2 substitutieregeling 2013-2014 vak OUDE programma sem. substitutievak(ken) sem. optie (zie bijlage 10.1) (2012-2013) 12-13 2013-2014 13-14 en/of toelichting Business Modelling 1.1 geen optie 3 (EBB656B06) Inleiding 1.2 Inleiding 1.2 optie 1 informatiesystemen informatiesystemen (INBIIS-08) (INBIIS-08) Financial Management 2.2 Financial Management 1.1 optie 1 for TM BDK (EBB751B05) (EBB046A05) Informatievisualisatie in 2.2 geen optie 3 organisaties (EBB696A04)

217


Management Accounting and Control (EBB636A05) Marketing Bedrijfskunde (EBB639A05) Organisatie en technologie II (EBB646A05) Operations Research 1 (EBB857A05) Production Organization and Control (EBB650B05) Object-georienteerd ontwerpen (EBB676A06) Wiskunde 2 voor TM (WIW2TM-03)

2.2


2.1

F.1.17.

1.1 1.2

1.2 2.1

2.1

1.1

Accounting for Management Control (EBB078A05) Marketing BDK (EBP027A05) Organisatie en omgeving (EBP028A05) Operations Research 1 (EBB857A05) Production Planning & Quality Control (EBB058A05) geen

1.2

optie 1

1.1

optie 2

2.2

optie 2

1.2

optie 1

2.2

optie 2

-

optie 3

Matrix Analysis and 1.1 Optimization (EBB066A05) Work Organization and 2.1 Job Design (EBB601B05)

optie 1

optie 1

Substitutieregeling BSc Technologiemanagement, profiel Procestechnologie

(= BSc-OER bijlage 10.17) In 2012-2013 is het tweede studiejaar van de bacheloropleiding Technologiemanagement voor het laatst aangeboden. Studenten van de bacheloropleiding Technologiemanagement, profiel Procestechnologie die in 20112012 of eerder met de opleiding zijn begonnen en per 1 september 2013 nog niet aan alle eisen van het tweede studiejaar hebben voldaan, dienen ter afronding van hun tweede studiejaar gebruik te maken van de navolgende substitutieregeling: BSc Technologiemanagement, proces Procestechnologie - studiejaar 2 substitutieregeling 2013-2014 vak OUDE programma sem. substitutievak(ken) sem. optie (zie bijlage 10.1) (2012-2013) 12-13 2013-2014 13-14 en/of toelichting Eenfase reactoren (TBK) 1.1 Eenfase reactoren (TBK) 1.1 optie 1 (CHEFR-08) (CHEFR-08) Financial Management 2.2 Financial Management 1.1 optie 1 for TM BDK (EBB751B05) (EBB046A05) Fysische 2.2 Fysische 2.2 optie 1 transportverschijnselen 1 transportverschijnselen (CHTFTV105E) 1 (CHTFTV105E) Management Accounting 2.2 Accounting for 1.2 optie 1 and Control Management Control (EBB636A05) (EBB078A05)

218


Marketing Bedrijfskunde (EBB639A05) Organisatie en technologie II (EBB646A05) Operations Research 1 (EBB857A05) Production Organization and Control (EBB650B05) Producttechnologie (CHTPT05E) Structuur en moleculen (TBSTMO-11) Wiskunde 2 voor TM (WIW2TM-03)

1.1


2.1

1.2

1.2 2.1

2.1 1.2 1.1

Marketing BDK (EBP027A05) Organisatie en omgeving (EBP028A05) Operations Research 1 (EBB857A05) Production Planning & Quality Control (EBB058A05) Producttechnologie (CHTPT05E) Structuur en moleculen (TBSTMO-11) Matrix Analysis and Optimization (EBB066A05) Work Organization and Job Design (EBB601B05)

1.1

optie 2

2.2

optie 2

1.2

optie 1

2.2

optie 2

2.1

optie 1

1.2

optie 1

1.1

optie 1

2.1

optie 1

219


F.2.

Substitutie- en overgangsregelingen masteropleidingen / Substitution and transition regulations master’s degree programmes

F.2.1.

Algemeen / General

(= MSc-OER bijlage 20.1) Zie bijlage 20.1 van de Onderwijs- en examenregeling masteropleidingen 2012-2013. (=MSc OER appendix 20.1) See Appendix 20.1 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations Master’s Degree Programmes 2012-2013. F.2.2.

Substitutieregeling MSc Accountancy en Controlling

(= MSc-OER bijlage 20.2) Studenten van de masteropleiding Accountancy en Controlling, traject Controlling die in 2011-2012 of eerder met de opleiding zijn begonnen en per 1 september 2013 nog niet aan alle eisen van de opleiding hebben voldaan, worden voor de afronding van hun opleiding verwezen naar de betreffende substitutieregeling in de Onderwijs- en Examenregeling van 2012-2013. F.2.3.

Substitution regulation MSc BA, track Business & ICT

(= MSc OER appendix 20.3) The track Business & ICT of the master Business Administration was offered for the last time in 2011-2012. Students in the master programme Business Administration, track Business & ICT who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the programme per 1 September 2013 are referred to the substitution regulation in Appendix 20.3 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013 to round off their master’s programme. F.2.4.

Substitution regulation MSc BA, track Business Development

(= MSc OER appendix 20.4) The track Business Development of the master Business Administration was offered for the last time in 2011-2012. Students in the master programme Business Administration, track Business Development who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the programme per 1 September 2013 are referred to the substitution regulation in Appendix 20.4 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013 to round off their master’s programme. F.2.5.

Substitution regulation MSc BA, track Change Management

(= MSc OER appendix 20.5) Students in the master programme Business Administration, track Change Management who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the (old) programme per 1 September 2013 are

220


referred to the substitution regulation in Appendix 20.5 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013 to round off their master’s programme. F.2.6.

Substitution regulation MSc BA, track Finance

(= MSc OER appendix 20.6) The track Finance of the master Business Administration was offered for the last time in 2011-2012. Students in the master programme Business Administration, track Finance who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the programme per 1 September 2013 are referred to the substitution regulation in Appendix 20.6 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013 to round off their master’s programme. F.2.7.

Substitution regulation MSc BA, track Marketing

(= MSc OER appendix 20.7) The track Marketing of the master Business Administration was offered for the last time in 2011-2012. Students in the master programme Business Administration, track Marketing Management who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the programme per 1 September 2013 are referred to the substitution regulation in Appendix 20.7 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013 to round off their master’s programme. F.2.8.

Substitution regulation MSc BA, track Organizational & Management Control

(= MSc OER appendix 20.8) Students in the master programme Business Administration, track Organizational & Management Control who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the (old) programme per 1 September 2013 are referred to the substitution regulation in Appendix 20.8 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013 to round off their master’s programme. F.2.9.

Substitution regulation MSc BA, track Operations & Supply Chains

(= MSc OER appendix 20.9) The track Operations & Supply Chains of the master Business Administration was offered for the last time in 2011-2012. Students in the master programme Business Administration, track Operations & Supply Chains Management who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the programme per 1 September 2013 are referred to the substitution regulation in Appendix 20.9 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013 to round off their master’s programme.

221


F.2.10.

Substitution regulation MSc BA, track Small Business & Entrepreneurship

(= MSc OER appendix 20.10) Students in the master programme Business Administration, track Small Business & Entrepreneurship who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the (old) programme per 1 September 2013 are referred to the substitution regulation in Appendix 20.10 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013 to round off their master’s programme. F.2.11.

Substitution regulation MSc BA, track Strategy & Innovation

(= MSc OER appendix 20.11) The track Strategy & Innovation of the master Business Administration was offered for the last time in 2011-2012. Students in the master programme Business Administration, track Strategy & Innovation who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the programme per 1 September 2013 are referred to the substitution regulation in Appendix 20.11 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013 to round off their master’s programme. F.2.12.

Substitution and transition regulations MSc Econometrics, Operations Research & Actuarial Studies

(= MSc OER appendix 20.12) Students in the master programme Econometrics, Operations Research & Actuarial Studies who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the (old) programme per 1 September 2013 are referred to the substitution regulation in Appendix 20.12 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013 to round off their master’s programme. Students of the master programme Econometrics, Operations Research & Actuarial Studies who are taking the new programme, and who have already rounded off courses from the old programme are referred to the transition regulation in Appendix 20.12 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013. F.2.13.

Substitution and transition regulations MSc Economics

(= MSc OER appendix 20.13) Students in the master programme Economics who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the (old) programme per 1 September 2013 are referred to the substitution regulation in Appendix 20.13 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013 to round off their master’s programme. Students of the master programme Economics who are taking the new programme, and who have already rounded off courses from the old programme are referred to

222


the transition regulation in Appendix 20.13 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013. F.2.14.

Transition regulation MSc Finance

(= MSc OER appendix 20.14) Students of the master programme Finance who have already rounded off courses from the programme of the MSc BA Finance are referred to the transition regulation in Appendix 20.14 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013. F.2.15.

Substitution and transition regulations MSc Human Resource Management

(= MSc OER appendix 20.15) Students in the master programme Human Resource Management who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the (old) programme per 1 September 2013 are are referred to the substitution regulation in Appendix 20.15 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 20122013 to round off their master’s programme. Students of the master programme Human Resource Management who are taking the new programme, and who have already rounded off courses from the old programme are referred to the transition regulation in Appendix 20.15 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013. F.2.16.

Substitution and transition regulations MSc International Business and Management, track IB&M

(= MSc OER appendix 20.16) Students in the master programme International Business and Management, track IB&M who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the (old) programme per 1 September 2013 are referred to the substitution regulation in Appendix 20.16 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013 to round off their master’s programme. Students of the master programme International Business & Management who are taking the new programme, and who have already rounded off courses from the old programme are referred to the transition regulation in Appendix 20.16 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013. F.2.17.

Substitution regulation MSc International Business and Management, track IFM

(= MSc OER appendix 20.17) The track International Financial Management of the master International Business and Management was offered for the last time in 2011-2012. Students in the master programme International Business and Management, track International Financial

223


Management who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the programme per 1 September 2013 are referred to the substitution regulation in Appendix 20.17 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013 to round off their master’s programme. F.2.18.

Substitution and transition regulations MSc International Economics and Business

(= MSc OER appendix 20.18) Students in the master programme International Economics and Business who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the (old) programme per 1 September 2013 are referred to the substitution regulation in Appendix 20.18 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 20122013 to round off their master’s programme. Students of the master programme International Economics & Business who are taking the new programme, and who have already rounded off courses from the old programme are referred to the transition regulation in Appendix 20.18 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013. F.2.19.

Transition regulation MSc International Financial Management

(= MSc OER appendix 20.19) Students of the master programme International Financial Management who have already rounded off courses from the old programme of the MSc IB&M, track IFM are referred to the transition regulation in Appendix 20.19 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013. F.2.20.

Transition regulation MSc Marketing

(= MSc OER appendix 20.20) Students of the master programme Marketing who have already rounded off courses from the old programme of the MSc Ba, track Marketing are referred to the transition regulation in Appendix 20.20 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 20122013. F.2.21.

Transition regulation MSc Supply Chain Management

(= MSc OER appendix 20.21) Students of the master programme Supply Chain Management who have already rounded off courses from the old programme of the MSc Ba, track Operations and Supply Chains are referred to the transition regulation in Appendix 20.21 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013.

224


F.2.22.

Substitution and transition regulations MSc Technology and Operations Management

(= MSc OER appendix 20.22) Students in the master programme Technology and Operations Management who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the (old) programme per 1 September 2013 are referred to the substitution regulation in Appendix 20.22 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013 to round off their master’s programme. Students of the master programme Technology and Operations Management who are taking the new programme, and who have already rounded off courses from the old programme are referred to the transition regulation in Appendix 20.22 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013. F.2.23.

Substitution and transition regulations Research Master Economics and Business

(= MSc OER appendix 20.23) Students in the Research Master Economics and Business who began their studies in 2011-2012 or earlier, and who have not satisfied all the requirements for the (old) programme per 1 September 2013 are referred to the substitution regulation in Appendix 20.23 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013 to round off their master’s programme. Students of the Research Master Economics and Business who are taking the new programme, and who have already rounded off courses from the old programme are referred to the transition regulation in Appendix 20.23 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations 2012-2013.

225

Faculteit Economie en Bedrijfskunde Faculty of Economics and Business. Studiegids Student Handbook Opleidingen Degree programmes

Recommend Documents